CyberLink

PowerDirector
User's Guide
Copyright and Disclaimer
All rights reserved.

To the extent allowed by law, PowerDirector IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY FOR
INFORMATION, SERVICES, OR PRODUCTS PROVIDED THROUGH OR IN
CONNECTION WITH PowerDirector AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXPECTATION OF PRIVACY, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
BY USING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE THAT CYBERLINK WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS
ARISING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE OR MATERIALS
CONTAINED EITHER IN THIS PACKAGE.

The terms and conditions here under shall be governed and

construed in accordance with the laws of Taiwan.

PowerDirector is a registered trademark along with other company

and product names mentioned in this publication, used for
identification purposes and remain the exclusive property of their
respective owners.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the

double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1995-2005 Dolby
Laboratories. All rights reserved.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under

license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the
Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS 5.1 Producer is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

International Headquarters
Mailing Address CyberLink Corporation
15F., No. 100, Minquan Rd., Xindian Dist.
New Taipei City 231, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Web Site http://www.cyberlink.com
Telephone 886-2-8667-1298
Fax 886-2-8667-1385
Copyright © 2015 CyberLink Corporation. All rights reserved.
Contents
..................................................1
Introduction
Welcome................................................................................................1
Latest
.................................................................................................1
Features
DirectorZone
.................................................................................................2
and CyberLink Cloud
PowerDirector
.................................................................................................3
Versions
System Requirements
................................................................................................4
..................................................7
PowerDirector Editing Modes
Full Feature
................................................................................................7
Editor
Easy Editor
................................................................................................8
Slideshow
................................................................................................11
Creator
Setting
.................................................................................................13
Music Preferences
Customizing
.................................................................................................14
Slideshows in the Slideshow Designer
..................................................19
PowerDirector Workspace
Rooms................................................................................................19
Media
.................................................................................................20
Room
Effect
.................................................................................................21
Room
PiP.................................................................................................21
Objects Room
Particle
.................................................................................................22
Room
Title
.................................................................................................22
Room
Transition
.................................................................................................22
Room
Audio
.................................................................................................23
Mixing Room
Voice-Over
.................................................................................................23
Recording Room
Chapter
.................................................................................................23
Room
Subtitle
.................................................................................................23
Room

i
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Library................................................................................................23
Window
Explorer
.................................................................................................25
View
Searching
.................................................................................................25
the PowerDirector Library
Filtering
.................................................................................................26
Media in the Library
Library
.................................................................................................26
Menu
Expanding
................................................................................................26
the Workspace
Preview................................................................................................27
Window
Preview
.................................................................................................28
Player Controls
Taking
.................................................................................................28
a Screen Snapshot
Preview/Display
.................................................................................................28
Options
Zoom
.................................................................................................31
In/Out
Undocking
.................................................................................................31
the Preview Window
Previewing
.................................................................................................31
in 3D Mode
Editing................................................................................................32
Workspace
Timeline
.................................................................................................33
View
Storyboard
.................................................................................................42
View
..................................................43
PowerDirector Projects
Setting................................................................................................43
Project Aspect Ratio
Exporting
................................................................................................44
Projects
Reusing
................................................................................................44
PowerDirector Projects
CyberLink
................................................................................................47
Cloud Projects
Importing Media into
..................................................49
PowerDirector
Importing
................................................................................................49
Media Files
3D.................................................................................................50
Media
Importing
.................................................................................................52
PowerDirector Projects
Capturing
................................................................................................53
Media
Capturing
.................................................................................................53
from a DV Camcorder
Capturing
.................................................................................................55
from an HDV Camcorder
Capturing
.................................................................................................55
from a TV Signal

ii
 Capturing
.................................................................................................56
from a Digital TV Signal
Capturing
.................................................................................................56
from a Webcam
Capturing
.................................................................................................56
from a Microphone
Capturing
.................................................................................................56
from a CD
Capturing
.................................................................................................56
from an AVCHD Camcorder
Capturing
.................................................................................................57
from an Optical Device
Captured
.................................................................................................57
Content
Quality
.................................................................................................57
Profile Setup
Capture
.................................................................................................58
Settings
Capture
.................................................................................................58
Preferences
Downloading
................................................................................................59
Media
Downloading
.................................................................................................59
Photos From Flickr
Downloading
.................................................................................................60
Content from DirectorZone/CyberLink Cloud
Detecting
................................................................................................62
Scenes and Extracting Audio
Detecting
.................................................................................................62
Scenes in a Video Clip
Extracting
.................................................................................................64
Audio from a Video Clip
..................................................65
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Using the
................................................................................................65
MultiCam Designer
Importing
.................................................................................................66
Media
Synchronizing
.................................................................................................68
Clips
Creating
.................................................................................................69
Recorded Content
Changing
.................................................................................................71
the Recorded Content
Using the
................................................................................................73
Theme Designer
Overview
.................................................................................................74
Adding
.................................................................................................74
Theme Templates/Sequences
Adding
.................................................................................................77
Media Clips
Editing
.................................................................................................79
Media Clips
Editing
.................................................................................................81
Background Music
Editing
.................................................................................................82
Title Text
Replacing
.................................................................................................83
Background Images
Adding
.................................................................................................83
Transitions Between Sequences
Previewing
.................................................................................................84
and Saving Movies

iii
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Editing
.................................................................................................84
Created Movies
Arranging Media in Your
..................................................85
Production
Adding................................................................................................86
Video Clips and Images to the Timeline
Adding
.................................................................................................87
Video Clips and Images
Adding
.................................................................................................88
Color Boards and Backgrounds
Adding................................................................................................91
Audio Clips
Magic
.................................................................................................93
Music
Syncing
.................................................................................................94
Audio
Syncing
................................................................................................96
Clips by Audio
Using the
................................................................................................97
Magic Movie Wizard
Using the
................................................................................................98
Slideshow Creator
..................................................99
Editing Your Media
Content................................................................................................99
Aware Editing
Using
.................................................................................................100
Content Aware Editing
Splitting
................................................................................................104
a Clip
Unlinking
................................................................................................105
Video/Audio Clips
Trimming
................................................................................................105
Video and Audio Clips
Trimming
.................................................................................................106
a Video Clip
Trimming
.................................................................................................109
an Audio Clip
Setting
................................................................................................111
a Media Clip's Duration
Setting
................................................................................................112
TV (Video Clip Interlacing) Format
Adjusting
................................................................................................112
Video Clip Aspect Ratio
Stretching
................................................................................................113
Images
Cropping
................................................................................................114
Images
Changing
................................................................................................115
the Shape of Media
Fixing................................................................................................116
and Enhancing Images/Videos
Applying
.................................................................................................117
ColorDirector Color Effects (Presets)
Advanced
.................................................................................................117
Fixes and Enhancements

iv
Power
................................................................................................118
Tools
Utilizing
................................................................................................119
Keyframes on Media
Adding
.................................................................................................121
Keyframes
Muting
................................................................................................124
Audio
Advanced
................................................................................................124
Audio Editing
Time ................................................................................................125
Info
Magic................................................................................................125
Fix
Magic................................................................................................125
Cut
Adding ..................................................127
Effects
Adding
................................................................................................127
Video Effects
Modifying
.................................................................................................128
a Video Effect
Using................................................................................................129
Magic Motion
Magic
.................................................................................................130
Motion Designer
Using................................................................................................131
Magic Style
Using................................................................................................132
the Freeze Frame Effect
Creating..................................................133
PiP Effects
Adding
................................................................................................133
PiP Objects
Creating
.................................................................................................134
Custom PiP Objects
Using................................................................................................136
the Paint Designer
Creating
.................................................................................................137
a Paint Animation
Modifying
................................................................................................140
Media in the PiP Designer
Mode
.................................................................................................141
Selection and Zoom Tools
Modifying
.................................................................................................142
PiP Media Size and Position
Modifying
.................................................................................................142
PiP Media Properties
Adding
.................................................................................................146
Motion to PiP Media
Adding
.................................................................................................149
PiP Masks
Utilizing
.................................................................................................150
PiP Keyframes
Saving
.................................................................................................152
and Sharing PiP Objects
Adding ..................................................155
Particle Effects

v
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Modifying
................................................................................................157
Particle Effects in the Particle Designer
Mode
.................................................................................................158
Selection and Zoom Tools
Adding
.................................................................................................159
Objects, Images, and Backgrounds
Modifying
.................................................................................................160
Particle Object Range and Position
Modifying
.................................................................................................161
Particle Object Properties
Adding
.................................................................................................165
Motion to Particle Objects
Utilizing
.................................................................................................166
Particle Keyframes
Saving
.................................................................................................168
and Sharing Particle Effect Templates
Adding ..................................................171
Title Effects
Modifying
................................................................................................173
Titles in the Title Designer
Mode
.................................................................................................174
Selection and Zoom Tools
Adding
.................................................................................................175
Text, Particles, Images, and Backgrounds
Modifying
.................................................................................................176
Title Effect Position
Modifying
.................................................................................................177
Title Text Properties
Applying
.................................................................................................183
Motion to Title Text
Utilizing
.................................................................................................185
Title Effect Keyframes
Saving
.................................................................................................186
and Sharing Title Templates
..................................................189
Using Transitions
Adding
................................................................................................189
Transitions to a Single Clip
Adding
................................................................................................191
Transitions Between Two Clips
Using................................................................................................192
Audio Transitions
Setting
................................................................................................193
Transition Behavior
Modifying
................................................................................................194
Transition Settings
Modifying
................................................................................................195
Alpha Transitions in the Transition Designer
Creating
.................................................................................................196
New Alpha Transitions
Modifying
.................................................................................................197
Alpha Transition Properties
Saving
.................................................................................................209
Alpha Transitions
Mixing Audio and Recording
..................................................213
Voice-Overs
Adjusting
................................................................................................213
Audio Clip Volume Levels

vi
 Mixing
.................................................................................................213
Audio In-Track
Mixing
.................................................................................................214
Audio in the Audio Mixing Room
Adding
.................................................................................................215
Fade Effects to Audio Clips
Restoring
.................................................................................................215
Audio Clip Volume Levels
Recording
................................................................................................216
Voice-Overs
Adding ..................................................219
Chapters
Adding
................................................................................................219
Chapters Markers
Setting
................................................................................................219
Chapter Thumbnails
Adding ..................................................221
Subtitles
Adding
................................................................................................221
Subtitle Markers
Importing
................................................................................................222
Subtitles from a File
Extracting
................................................................................................222
Subtitles from an MKV File
Editing
................................................................................................223
Subtitles
Syncing
................................................................................................224
Subtitles
..................................................225
Producing Your Project
Utilizing
................................................................................................225
Intelligent SVRT
Produce
................................................................................................226
Window
Outputting
.................................................................................................228
to a Standard 2D File
Outputting
.................................................................................................230
in a 3D Format
Outputting
.................................................................................................233
to a Device
Uploading
.................................................................................................235
Video to Online Media Sites
Batch
.................................................................................................244
Produce
Creating..................................................247
Discs
Importing
................................................................................................248
Additional Disc Content
Selecting
................................................................................................250
a Disc Menu
Editing
................................................................................................252
Disc Menu Properties
Configuring
.................................................................................................252
Disc Menu Settings
Editing
.................................................................................................253
Disc Menu Text
Setting
.................................................................................................253
Disc Menu Music

vii
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Adding
.................................................................................................254
a First Play Video
Setting
.................................................................................................255
Disc Playback Mode
Specifying
.................................................................................................255
Buttons Per Page
Modifying
.................................................................................................256
Menu Object Properties
Customizing
................................................................................................257
Disc Menus in the Menu Designer
Mode
.................................................................................................258
Selection, Zoom Tools, and Context Menu
Setting
.................................................................................................259
Menu Opening and Background
Adding
.................................................................................................261
Images to Menus
Adding
.................................................................................................261
and Editing Disc Menu Title Text
Adding
.................................................................................................267
and Editing Menu Buttons
Enabling
.................................................................................................269
3D Depth in Disc Menus
Saving
.................................................................................................269
and Sharing Disc Menu Templates
Burning
................................................................................................271
Your Production to Disc
Burning
.................................................................................................271
a Disc in 2D
Burning
.................................................................................................273
a Disc in 3D
Configuring
.................................................................................................276
Burn Settings
Erasing
.................................................................................................276
Discs
..................................................279
PowerDirector Preferences
General
................................................................................................279
Preferences
Capture
................................................................................................280
Preferences
Confirmation
................................................................................................281
Preferences
DirectorZone
................................................................................................282
Preferences
Editing
................................................................................................283
Preferences
File Preferences
................................................................................................284
Display
................................................................................................285
Preferences
Hardware
................................................................................................286
Acceleration Preferences
Project
................................................................................................287
Preferences
Produce
................................................................................................287
Preferences
Improvement
................................................................................................288
Program Preferences
CyberLink
................................................................................................288
Cloud Preferences

viii
 ..................................................291
PowerDirector Hotkeys
Default
................................................................................................291
Keyboard Hotkeys
Application
.................................................................................................292
Menu Bar Hotkeys
System
.................................................................................................295
Hotkeys
Capture
.................................................................................................295
Hotkeys
Edit
.................................................................................................296
Hotkeys
Designer
.................................................................................................296
Hotkeys
Customizing
................................................................................................297
Keyboard Hotkeys
Hotkey
.................................................................................................298
Sets
..................................................301
Appendix
Intelligent
................................................................................................301
SVRT: When Is Used?
Licensing
................................................................................................302
and Copyright Information
Licenses
.................................................................................................304
and Copyrights
..................................................317
Technical Support
Before
................................................................................................317
Contacting Technical Support
Web Support
................................................................................................318
Help Resources
................................................................................................318

ix
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

x
 Intro ductio n

Chapter 1:

Introduction
This chapter introduces CyberLink PowerDirector and the digital video editing
process. It also outlines all of the latest features, available versions, and reviews the
minimum system requirements for CyberLink PowerDirector.
Note: this document is for reference and informational use only. Its content
and the corresponding program are subject to change without notice. For
more helpful tips on using the program, please visit our members forum or
see the video tutorials at http://directorzone.cyberlink.com/tutorial/pdr.

Welcome
Welcome to the CyberLink family of digital media tools. CyberLink PowerDirector is
a digital video editing program that lets you create professional-looking videos and
photo slideshows, complete with music, voice-overs, special effects, transitions,
and much more. You can then output your project to a file, camcorder, portable
device, upload it directly to various online video sharing web sites, or burn it to a
disc, complete with stylish menus.

Latest Features
This section outlines the latest features within the CyberLink PowerDirector
program.
Unleash your PC's speed with TrueVelocity 4.
Adds format support for H.265 HEVC* and XAVC S* video, as well as ALAC
audio. Also adds support for QuickTime with alpha (animated .PNG).
Faster photo importing and more camera support.
Sync multiple video and audio clips directly in the timeline using sync by
audio*.
Use the enhanced stabilizer for improved stabilization of your video clips.
Create and edit alpha transitions in the Transition Designer*.
Alter title text opacity, rotation, position, and size (scale) using keyframes.
Improved program usability with media library search and reusable projects.

1
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Easier audio mixing with the audio level meters.

More flexible Create Disc module, letting you more easily create the disc
menus you want.
Burn Blu-ray* Discs with Full HD 50p/60p video profile.
Save productions as created DVD and Blu-ray* disc ISO images.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

DirectorZone and CyberLink Cloud

You can upload/download effects and templates, and back up media, preferences,
projects, and more with the DirectorZone and CyberLink Cloud* features.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

DirectorZone
DirectorZone is a free web service that lets you search for and download theme
templates, PiP objects, paint animations, title templates, particle objects, sound
clips, and disc menus created by other users of CyberLink PowerDirector.
To access the benefits of DirectorZone, you can sign in by:
clicking the Sign in to DirectorZone link in the top right corner of the
CyberLink PowerDirector window.

clicking the button at the top of the window to open the PowerDirector
preferences, and then on the DirectorZone tab. See DirectorZone Preferences
for more information.
Go to http://directorzone.cyberlink.com to find out more information on the
features and benefits of the DirectorZone web service.

Go to http://directorzone.cyberlink.com to view more information on the features

and benefits of the DirectorZone web site.

2
 Intro ductio n

CyberLink Cloud
CyberLink Cloud is a cloud storage service from CyberLink where users can upload
and download their effects and templates, PowerDirector projects, produced video
clips, and more. CyberLink Cloud allows users to back up media, preferences,
projects, etc., and ensure their working environment is the same on multiple
computers.
Note: CyberLink Cloud is a subscription cloud storage service that is
included with some CyberLink products, and is available for purchase
through our web site. For more detailed information, see http://www.
cyberlink.com/products/cyberlink-cloud/.

PowerDirector Versions
The features that are available to you within CyberLink PowerDirector are
completely dependent on the version you have installed on your computer.
Supported file formats, editing features, disc-making functions, and other features
vary depending on the version that you have.
To view the PowerDirector version table, please go to our web site: http://www.
cyberlink.com/products/powerdirector-ultra/compare_en_US.html
To determine your version of CyberLink PowerDirector, click on the CyberLink
PowerDirector logo in the top right corner or select ? > About CyberLink
PowerDirector.

PowerDirector Live
PowerDirector Live is a subscription based version of CyberLink PowerDirector that
provides all the editing features you expect, and adds the CyberLink Cloud storage
service and more.
With a PowerDirector Live subscription, you get:
All the award-winning features of the Ultimate version of CyberLink
PowerDirector, including the production of 4K ultra HD video and stunning
3D movies.
The ability to back up program preferences, projects, project media, and (PiP
object, paint animation, title effect, particle effect, disc menu) templates on
the cloud storage space CyberLink Cloud.

3
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Guaranteed updates to the latest versions of CyberLink PowerDirector

Ultimate.
PowerDirector Live is the must-have solution for on-the-go video editors who want
easy access to their media and the latest up-to-date editing technologies.

Updating PowerDirector
Software upgrades and updates (patches) are periodically available from CyberLink.
CyberLink PowerDirector automatically prompts you when either is available.
Note: you can prevent CyberLink PowerDirector from auto checking for
updates/upgrades in General Preferences.

To update your software, do this:

1. Click the button to open the Upgrade window.

2. Click the available tabs to see the Updates, Upgrades, and enhancements (
Installed Packs) available.
3. Select an item on a tab to open your web browser, where you can purchase
product upgrades or download the latest patch update.
Note: you must connect to the Internet to use this feature.

System Requirements
The system requirements listed below are recommended as minimums for general
digital video production work.

System Requirements
Operating System Microsoft Windows 8/8.1 (32 bit and 64
bit).
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Basic, Home
Premium, Professional, Ultimate (32 bit
and 64 bit).
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic,

4
 Intro ductio n

Home Premium, Business, Ultimate (32 bit

and 64 bit).
Screen Resolution 1024 x 768, 16-bit color or above.
CPU Processor This version of CyberLink PowerDirector is
optimized for CPUs with MMX/SSE/
SSE2/3DNow!/3DNow! Extension/
HyperThreading/AVX2 technology.
SD video editing and export: Pentium 4 3.0
GHz or AMD Athlon 64 X2 or above
(Required).
AVCHD* and BD* burning: Pentium Core 2
Duo E6400, or AMD Phenom II X4
(Recommended).
Full-HD video editing and export: Intel
Corei5/7 or AMD Phenom II X4
(Recommended).
2K/4K/3D* video editing and export: Intel
Corei7 or AMD FX with 64bit OS and 6 GB
RAM (Recommended).
Multiple camera editing: Intel Core i5/7 or
AMD Phenom II X4 (Recommended).
Graphics Card 128 MB VGA VRAM or higher (1 GB or
higher VRAM and OpenCL capable are
recommended).
Memory 2 GB required.
3 GB or above recommended for 32 bit
OS.
6 GB or above recommended for 64 bit
OS.
Hard Disk Space (Installation) Deluxe
6.5 GB.
Ultra
7 GB.
Ultimate and Ultimate Suite
8.5 GB (11 GB recommended to install all
premium content).
Hard Disk Space (Burning) 10 GB (20 GB recommended) free for DVD

5
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

production.
60 GB (100 GB recommended) free for Blu-
ray Disc/AVCHD production*.
Burning Drive A CD or DVD burner (CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW
or DVD-R/RW) is required to burn VCD/
DVD/SVCD/AVCHD* titles.
A Blu-ray Disc recordable drive is required
to burn Blu-ray Discs*.
Internet Connection Required for program activation and other
online services.
Required for the activation for some
import/export formats, including AVCHD,
Blu-ray Disc, DVD, H.264, XAVC S, and
MPEG-2. The activation is quick and easy.
Other Windows Media Player 9 or above is
required.
Note: please consult the CyberLink web site (http://www.cyberlink.com/
products/powerdirector-ultimate/spec_en_US.html) for the most recent
system requirements information. * optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.

6
 Po w erDirecto r Editing M o des

Chapter 2:

PowerDirector Editing
Modes
CyberLink PowerDirector has three separate editors to fit your editing requirements.
When you launch the program from the start menu, or the CyberLink
PowerDirector shortcut on the desktop, you are prompted to choose one of the
following editing modes:
Note: before selecting your preferred editing mode, be sure to set the video
aspect ratio for your project (16:9 or 4:3).

Full Feature Editor: select this option to enter the classic editing mode of
CyberLink PowerDirector, where all of the program's features are available to
you.
Easy Editor: if you are new to the editing process and not sure how or where
to get started, then the Easy Editor can help. The Magic Movie Wizard takes
you through a step-by-step process to import, style, adjust, and preview your
finished movie, in just a few steps. You can then edit the created production,
output it to a video file, or burn it to a disc.
Slideshow Creator: with the Slideshow Creator you can instantly turn your
photos into a dynamic slideshow. Follow the steps in the Slideshow Creator to
import your photos, add background music, and stylish slideshow templates.
Once done, you can preview the slideshow, before outputting it as a video file
or burning it to disc.
Note: select the Always enter the full feature editor option at the bottom
of this dialog to skip this window at startup. You can always reset this
selection at any time in Confirmation Preferences.

Full Feature Editor

In the Full Feature Editor of CyberLink PowerDirector you have the freedom to
perform every function and use every feature that is available in your version of the
program. The path you take to create your video production is up to you. Use the
features you are familiar with to make your movie, or experiment to create
something new.

7
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

In the Full Feature Editor there are four main modules available to you:

Module Description
Capture Capture media in a number of formats, from a variety
of different sources. See Capturing Media.
Edit In the Edit module you can edit and trim your
imported media, arrange it in your video production,
add effects, titles, PiP objects, transitions, music,
chapters, subtitles, and much more. See the relevant
section of this help file that corresponds with the
editing feature you'd like to use.
Produce In the Produce module you can output your created
production to a video file in a variety of formats
(including 3D formats), a device (camcorder, mobile
phone, or other portable device), or upload it to
YouTube, Facebook, DailyMotion, or Vimeo. See
Producing Your Project.
Create Disc Use the features in the Create Disc module to design
discs with menus, and then burn your video
production in a variety of different formats in 2D or
3D. See Creating Discs.

When CyberLink PowerDirector launches in the Full Feature Editor, it automatically

opens in the Edit module. You can easily switch among the available modules to
perform your required task.

Easy Editor
If you are new to the editing process and not sure how or where to get started, then
the Easy Editor can help. The Magic Movie Wizard takes all of your media and
creates a completed video production in just a few steps.
To create your video production using the Magic Movie Wizard in the Easy Editor,
do this:

8
 Po w erDirecto r Editing M o des

Note: if you want more creative control than the Magic Movie Wizard
provides, you can also use the Theme Designer to create your video
production. The Theme Designer allows you to customize the theme
templates used and choose the exact images, video clips, and background
music you want in your production. See Using the Theme Designer for more
information.
1. Select Easy Editor when prompted which mode you prefer at startup. The
Magic Movie Wizard displays.
Note: if you are in the Full Feature Editor, you can quickly launch the Magic
Movie Wizard by clicking on the button above the timeline and
selecting M agic M ovie Wizard.

2. In the Source window, click to import all of the media you want to use in
your video production. Select Import Media Files to import a number of
individual video or image files, or select Import a Media Folder if all of your
media is in a specific folder on your computer's hard drive. CyberLink
PowerDirector will import all of the supported media file formats in the
selected folder.

Note: click to remove any unwanted media files from your production.

3. Click Next to continue.

4. In the Style window, select from the available movie styles. Each style you
select will result in a different outputted video. Select Download more
templates from DirectorZone* to get more style templates. See DirectorZone
for more information.
Note: the style templates with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode
and when outputted in 3D video productions. * optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
5. Click Next to continue.

6. In the Adjustment window, click to add music to your production.

Then use the available controls to do the following:

use the button to add more music files to the background music
playlist. Use the and buttons to set the order of the music in the
playlist. The total duration of all the music added is noted above the playlist.

9
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Mix audio level between music and the video's audio: use the slider to mix the
audio level, by deciding whether to have more background music or the
original video's audio in the production.
Specify the movie duration: here you can specify how long your movie will
be. Select Original duration if you don't want the Magic Movie Wizard to make
any edits to your imported media; Select Set output duration to manually
specify how long you want the movie to be in the field provided; Select Fit
duration to background music if you want your video production to match
the duration of the music you imported into the playlist.
7. Click the Settings* button to use the sliders to customize the criteria the
Magic Movie Wizard uses to cut your movie. Click OK to save the settings.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

8. Click Next to continue.

9. In the Preview window the Magic Movie Wizard generates a version of your
production. Enter a Starting title and Ending title for your production in the
fields provided, and then use the available player controls to preview it.
Note: if you are not satisfied with the current video production you can click
the Previous button to return to previous windows to add/remove music,
select a different style, change the criteria settings, duration, or import
more media. You can also click the Reorder M edia button to shuffle the
media files in the created production for a different look, or the Edit in the
Theme Designer button if you want to customize the style template used.
See Using the Theme Designer for more information.
10. Click Next to continue.
11. You are done. To finish and close the Easy Editor, choose one of the
following:
Produce Video: click to enter the Produce module where you can output your
production to a video file, device, or upload it to a video sharing web site. See
Producing Your Project.
Create Disc: click to burn your production to a disc, complete with a
professional looking disc menu, in the Create Disc module. See Creating Discs.
Advanced Editing: click this option if you'd like to perform some more
advanced editing on your production in the Edit module.

10
 Po w erDirecto r Editing M o des

Slideshow Creator
The Slideshow Creator is the easiest way to create a dynamic slideshow with your
photos.

To create a slideshow in the Slideshow Creator, do this:

1. Select Slideshow Creator when prompted which mode you prefer at startup.
The first Slideshow Creator window displays.
Note: if you are in the Full Feature Mode, you can launch the Slideshow
Creator by adding photos to the timeline, selecting them, and then clicking
on the Slideshow button above the timeline. See Using the Slideshow
Creator for more information.

2. In the Source window, click to import all of the photos you want to use in
your slideshow. Select Import Image Files to import a number of individual
photos, or select Import an Image Folder if all of your photos are in a specific
folder on your computer's hard drive. CyberLink PowerDirector will import all
of the supported image formats in the selected folder.
Note: you can right-click on a photo and select Set 3D Source Format if
required. For more information, please refer to Setting 3D Source Format.

You can also click to remove any unwanted photos from your
slideshow.
3. Click Next to continue.
4. In the Style & Music window, select a slideshow style. Each style you
select will result in a different slideshow.

5. In the Style & Music window, click the button to add background
music to your slideshow. After adding music, click the Music Preferences
button to customize the music duration and add fades. See Setting Music
Preferences for a detail description of the available preferences.
6. In the Style & Music window, click the Slideshow Preferences button to set
your slideshow preferences as follows:
Duration: use this option to set the length of your slideshow. Select Fit photos
to music to have the length of the slideshow match the duration of the added
background music. Select Fit music to photos (if launched in Full Feature
Mode) for the length of the music to match the duration of the slideshow, i.e.
its specified length on the timeline.

11
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Sequence: use this option to set the order of the photos in the slideshow.
Select Timeline order (if launched in Full Feature Mode) to have the sequence
match the order the photos are currently displayed in the timeline. Select
Date/time taken for the photos to display in chronological order based on the
date and time they were taken.
Detect faces: some slideshow templates include this option. When selected,
the Slideshow Creator will scan and detect the faces in the photos included in
the slideshow. The faces in the photos will then become the area of focus in
the created photo slideshows.
Click OK to save your changes.

7. Click Next to continue.

8. In the Preview window, the Slideshow Creator generates a version of your
slideshow. Use the available player controls to preview it.
Note: if you are not satisfied with the current slideshow, you can click the
Previous button to return to previous windows to select a different style, or
import more photos. Also, if available, click the Replace Background
button in the Preview window to replace the background image used in the
slideshow, or Customize to fully customize your slideshow in the
Slideshow Designer. See Customizing Slideshows in the Slideshow
Designer for a detailed description of all the available options for your
selected slideshow style.
9. Click Next to continue.
10. You are done. To finish and close the Easy Editor, choose one of the
following:
Produce Video: click to enter the Produce window where you can output your
slideshow to a video file, device, or upload it to a video sharing web site. See
Producing Your Project.
Create Disc: click to burn your slideshow to a disc, complete with a
professional looking disc menu, in the Create Disc window. See Creating Disc.
Advanced Editing: click this option if you'd like to perform some more
advanced editing on your slideshow in the Edit window.
Note: if you select the Advanced Editing option, the Slideshow Creator
adds your created slideshow to the timeline in the Edit window as a
combined video file. If you would like to view each individual slide/photo in
the slideshow for advanced editing, just right-click on the file in the timeline
and then select Show Individual Photos.

12
 Po w erDirecto r Editing M o des

Setting Music Preferences

If you are using background music in your slideshow, click on the Music
Preferences button in the Style & Music window of the Slideshow Creator to
configure the preferences as follows:
1. In the Trim audio section you can trim the length of the music file you added
as background music as follows:
use the player controls to find the desired start point for the music, and then
click .
use the player controls to find the desired end point for the music, and then
click .
drag the markers on the music timeline to set the desired start and end times
manually.

2. Select the Fade-in option to have the background music gradually fade-in at
the beginning of the slideshow.
3. Select the Fade out option to have the background music gradually fade-out
at the end of the slideshow.
4. Click OK to save your changes.

13
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Customizing Slideshows in the Slideshow

Designer
In the Preview window of the Slideshow Creator, click on the Customize button to
open the Slideshow Designer to modify the selected slideshow style.
Note: if the Customize button is not available in the Preview window, the
slideshow style template you selected cannot be customized in the
Slideshow Designer.

A - Preview Area , B - Editing Area , C - Slide Area , D - Extra Tools Area , E - Selected Slide

14
 Po w erDirecto r Editing M o des

The editing options and tools that are available in the Slideshow Designer, depend
on the slideshow style template you selected. The following outlines the editing
options available for the style templates that utilize the Slideshow Designer.

Camera/Cell Slideshow
When customizing a Camera or Cell slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can
perform the following functions:
in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
in the preview area, click and drag a photo to an alternative cell.
in the editing area (Unused photos), click the Add Photos button to import
additional photos for use in the slideshow.
in the editing area (Unused photos), indicate the maximum number of photos
that are displayed on a slide.
in the editing area, drag and drop the photos from Unused photos to the cell
in the preview area where you want it on the slide. You can also highlight a
cell by clicking it and use the buttons to add or remove selected
photos.

in the preview area, select a cell with a photo and then click on the button
to set the focus of that cell on a specific portion of the photo. Manually resize
and drag the box to set the desired focus area.
in the extra tools area, click the Remix button to generate a new version of
the slideshow.
in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.

Motion Slideshow
When customizing a Motion slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can perform
the following functions:
in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
in the editing area (Cropping area), use the Magic Motion Designer to
customize the motion on the slide. See Magic Motion Designer for detailed

15
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

instructions on using all its features.

in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.

Highlight Slideshow
When customizing a Highlight slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can
perform the following functions:
in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
in the extra tools area, select whether you want to edit the foreground or
background photo.
in the editing area (Cropping area), resize and drag the box to the area of the
photo you want highlighted on the slide.
in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.

3D/Balloon/Frozen Space/Outer Space

Slideshow
When customizing a 3D, Frozen Space, or Future slideshow in the Slideshow
Designer, you can perform the following functions:
in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
in the editing area (Cropping area), resize and drag the box to the area of the
photo you want highlighted in the photo on the slide.
click the Replace Background button if you want to import a custom image
to use as the slideshow's background.
Note: the slideshow background cannot be replaced for slideshows using
the Balloon template.

in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.

Time-Lapse Slideshow
When customizing a time-lapse slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can

16
 Po w erDirecto r Editing M o des

specify the following settings:

Note: to create a time-lapse slideshow, you need to prepare the photos for
it ahead of time. This feature works best with a series of photos taken with a
camera that supports time-lapse photography.

Duration of each image: in the field provided, specify how long you want
each of the imported images to display. Each image can display for as long as
99 frames, or as short as for 1 single video frame.
For each displayed image, skip: when importing a large number of images
that were taken over a period of time, you may find the need to remove some
of the images to reduce the slideshow's duration. In the field provided, enter
the number of images you want to remove for each displayed image in your
slideshow.

17
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

18
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

Chapter 3:

PowerDirector Workspace
This chapter outlines the CyberLink PowerDirector workspace, and all of its features.
The workspace in the Edit module is where you will spend most of your time when
using CyberLink PowerDirector, so getting familiar with everything is has to offer is
recommended.

A - Room s, B - Im port M edia , C - Pow erDirector Plug-ins, D - Libra ry Window , E - Expa nda ble
Workspa ce, F - Preview Window , G - Zoom In/Out, H - Undock Preview Window , I - 3D Displa y
Configura tion, J - Ena ble/Disa ble 3D M ode, K - Preview Qua lity/Displa y Options, L - Ta ke Sna pshot,
M - Preview Pla yer Controls, N - Editing Workspa ce, O - Tim eline Ruler, P - Function Buttons, Q -
Ra nge Selection, R - View Entire M ovie, S - Tra ck M a na ger, T - Tim eline/Storyboa rd View

Rooms
The various rooms in the Edit module of CyberLink PowerDirector are where you
can access all of your media, effects, titles, and transitions when editing your video
production. You can also gain access to controls for recording and mixing audio,
adding chapters or subtitles. By default, the library window displays the Media

19
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Room.

Media Room
The Media Room provides access to your media library and the PowerDirector plug-
ins. The media library contains your video, audio, and image files. You can also
access a number of useful color boards and backgrounds for use in your video
productions, or view your library of saved projects.

Click to access the PowerDirector plug-ins. See PowerDirector Plug-ins for a

detailed description of the plug-ins and their available features.

Managing the Media Library

Use the button to manage the media in your media library. You can sort the
media, change the media thumbnail icon size, or select Details to view file
information instead of a thumbnail.
Note: if you cannot find this button when in the media library, you may need
to resize the preview window to reveal it. See Expanding the Workspace for
more information.

Other media library management options include:

Note: see Library Window for more information about the library menu
options available in all rooms.

Export Library: select to export your entire media library as a file for backup,
in the PDL (PowerDirector Library) format.
Import Library: select to import a media library PDL file, exported from
another project or version of CyberLink PowerDirector.
Empty the Library: select to empty the entire contents of the media library.
Remove All Unused Content from Library: select if you just want to remove
the media that is not being used in the current project.

Content Aware Details

When in the Media Room, you can select the Content Aware Details* option from

20
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

the library menu to view the analysis results for all the video clips analyzed and
edited in Content Aware Editing. Clips that were previously analyzed are indicated
by the green (good parts) and light brown (bad parts) dots in the specific columns.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To analyze video clips in this view, select them in the Analyze column and then
click the Analyze button.

To edit a video clip using Content Aware Editing, click . If the video clip has
not yet been analyzed, CyberLink PowerDirector will do this first before opening the
Content Aware Editing window.
See Content Aware Editing for more detailed information on this feature.

Effect Room
The Effect Room contains a library of special effects that are used on the video files
and images in your project. For more information, see Adding Effects.
Note: the video effects with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode and
when outputted in 3D video productions.

PiP Objects Room

The PiP Objects Room contains a library of PiP objects, or graphics, that you can
add on top of the video or images on a video track. You can place PiP objects onto
any track in the timeline. The PiP Objects Room also includes paint animation
objects and access to the Paint Designer.
Note: the PiP objects with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode and
when outputted in 3D video productions.

There are four main types of objects in the PiP Objects Room:

static graphics.
motion graphics that move through clips.
decorative borders that are added to frame your video.

21
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

hand drawn paint animation objects you create in the Paint Designer.
For information on adding PiP objects, see Adding PiP Objects. For
information on the hand drawn paint animation objects you can create in the
Paint Designer, see Using the Paint Designer.

Particle Room
The Particle Room contains a library of effects you can place on a video track to
add a particle object (snow, clouds, smoke, etc.) on top of a video or image on a
video track.
Note: the particle effects with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode
and when outputted in 3D video productions.

You can modify particles in the Particle Designer. For more information, see
Adding Particle Effects.

Title Room
The Title Room contains the library of title effects that when applied to your
project, add credits or comments to your production. For more information, see
Adding Title Effects.
Note: the title templates with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode
and when outputted in 3D video productions. See The Difference Between
3D and 3D-Like Effects to learn more about both types of effects.

Transition Room
The Transition Room contains transitions that you can use on or between clips in
your project. Transitions let you control how media appears and disappears in your
project, and changes from one clip to the next. For more information, see Using
Transitions.
Note: you can now create your own custom transitions, or edit existing
alpha transitions, using the Transition Designer. See Modifying Alpha
Transitions in the Transition Designer for more information.

The transitions with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode and when
outputted in 3D video productions. See The Difference Between 3D and 3D-Like
Effects to learn more about both types of effects.

22
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

Audio Mixing Room

In the Audio Mixing Room you can use controls to mix all of the audio tracks in
your project. For more information, see Mixing Audio and Recording Voice-Overs.

Voice-Over Recording Room

In the Voice-Over Recording Room you can record a voice over for your video
production, while you are watching it play back. For more information, see
Recording Voice-Overs.

Chapter Room
In the Chapter Room* you can automatically or manually set chapter markers for
your project. Setting chapters on your final disc allows viewers to jump from the
menu page to the chapter markers you have set in order to navigate through your
disc. For more information, see Adding Chapters.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Subtitle Room
In the Subtitle Room you can add subtitles to your video production manually or
through the import of a TXT, SRT, or MKV file. For more information, see Adding
Subtitles.

Library Window
The library window contains all of the media in CyberLink PowerDirector, including
your video, images, and audio files. When you are in other rooms (Effect Room, PiP
Objects Room, etc.), it contains the effects, titles, and transitions you apply to your
media.
The media content and available buttons that display in the library window depend
on the room you are currently in.
Use the slider above the library window to adjust the size of the media thumbnails
in the library.

23
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

You can also resize the media thumbnails by selecting a default size from the
library menu.

24
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

Explorer View
Select the button to display the explorer view within the library windows.

In the explorer view you can use tags to categorize the media in your library. This
lets you quickly browse through and filter the media in each room.
In the explorer view you can:

click on to add a new tag in a library window.

select an existing tag and then click to delete a previously created tag.
filter the media in the library window by selecting an existing tag.

Searching the PowerDirector Library

If you are looking for specific media, effects, or templates in a library window, use
the search function to find it.
To search in the library, do this:
1. Enter in a keyword in the search field located on top of the library window.

2. CyberLink PowerDirector filters the content in the library window based on

the keywords entered.

25
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: click on to clear the search results.

Filtering Media in the Library

Use the available drop-down menus at the top of the library window to filter the
media that is displayed. For example, when viewing the media in the Media Room,
use the Media Content drop-down to display your media content, the available
color boards, backgrounds, your saved projects, or to select a tag. Use the All
Media drop-down to display all or one type of media file if you want to find a
certain type of media file quickly.

Library Menu
Click on to access the library menu. In the library menu you can sort the
content in a room by name, date created, file size, and more. You can also select all
the content in the room or change the media/effect thumbnail display size. Other
options that are available in the library menu, but are dependent on the specific
room you are in.
Note: if you cannot find this button when in the media library, you may need
to resize the preview window to reveal it. See Expanding the Workspace for
more information.

Expanding the Workspace

The look of the CyberLink PowerDirector workspace is fully expandable and
customizable based on your personal preference.

26
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

Simply drag the borders of the preview window and timeline to resize them to your
liking. This allows you to get the most out of your display device space and
customize the size of the preview window as you work.
Note: you can also undock the preview window for a much larger timeline
and library view. See Undocking the Preview Window for more information.

Preview Window
While creating your video production, you can preview it in the preview window
using the available player controls.

27
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Preview Player Controls

With the player controls you can preview your production as you edit, including
playing your project from the current timeline position, or pausing and stopping
playback.
Click the Clip button to play back only the clip that is selected in the timeline, or
Movie to play the entire video production. When viewing media in Clip mode, the
cross hairs and grid lines/TV safe zone (if enabled) are visible to help with the
placement of the selected clip in the video display area. When in Movie mode,
these items are hidden.
Note: you can set PowerDirector to auto switch the playback mode to
M ovie mode in Editing Preferences.

Use the button to select a seek by method (frame, second, minute, scene,
subtitle, chapter, segment) and then use the buttons on either side of it for a more
precise step through of your current production.
You can also click and drag the playback slider, or enter in a specific timecode in
the time field, and then press the enter key on your keyboard to quickly find a
specific scene.

Click the button to undock the preview window for a larger view of your
production. See Undocking the Preview Window for more information.

Taking a Screen Snapshot

While previewing your project, you can take a still 2D screen snapshot and save it as
a BMP, JPG, GIF, or PNG image file. You can also take a still 3D screen snapshot and
save it as an MPO or JPS image file.

To do this click the button on the player controls.

You can change the image file format (or the default image file name) on the File
Preferences tab. See File Preferences for more information.

Preview/Display Options
CyberLink PowerDirector includes some preview and display options that help
make your editing experience easier. Click on to set the preview quality, show

28
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

the TV safe zone, display grid lines, or enable dual preview.

Note: you can set the default settings for these options in Display
Preferences.

Preview Quality
Click , select Preview Quality, and then a preview quality from the list (Full HD*,
HD*, high, normal, low) to set the resolution/quality of the video used when
previewing your movie in the preview window. The higher the quality you select,
the more resources that are required to preview your video project.
Note: Full HD and HD preview resolution are only available when the Ultra
version of CyberLink PowerDirector is installed on a 64-bit operating
system.

Preview Mode
CyberLink PowerDirector provides two modes you can use to preview your video
production:
Real-time Preview: synchronizes and renders clips and effects in real-time,
displaying a preview of your video at the specified frames per second. See the
timeline frame rate option in General Preferences for information on setting
the correct frame rate for your production.
Non Real-time Preview: mutes the audio and displays a preview at a reduced
speed to help make editing go more smoothly. Useful when editing high-
definition video, using multiple PiP tracks on a less powerful computer, or
when you receive dropped frames when previewing. By muting the audio and
slowing down the video, CyberLink PowerDirector lets you view more frames
per second when your computer has trouble providing a smooth preview
during editing.
Note: you can also preview a portion of your video using the Render
Preview and Produce Range options. See Range Selection for more
information on these functions.

29
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

TV Safe Zone/Grid Lines

When you place media on the timeline, use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help
with the precise placement on your video project's image. These display options are
only available when in the Clip preview mode.

Click the button and then select TV Safe Zone > On to enable a box that
indicates the on-screen area of most TV displays.

Click the button, select Grid Lines, and then select the number of lines
you want to display in a grid over the video image. Use this grid to more
precisely place the PiP media and title text on the video image.
Once enabled, select Snap to Reference Lines* to have the selected objects snap to
the grid lines, TV safe zone, and the boundary of the preview window.

Dual Preview
If you have a secondary display device, such as a monitor, TV, or DV camcorder
connected to your computer, click the button and then select Dual Preview*
to extend your workspace and preview your project on a secondary display.
Note: to use a connected monitor or TV as a secondary preview window,
you must first enable extend desktop to a secondary display in the
Windows Display Properties Settings. * optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
Once enabled, when you click play in the preview window, you can preview your
production on both your primary and secondary display when Primary 2D and
Secondary 2D Display is selected. Select DV Camcorder to extend your production
preview to a connected DV camcorder device.

3D Dual Preview
When your desktop is extended to a secondary display, you can enable 3D on one
of the two devices. If you want one of your previews to be in 3D, select either
Primary 2D and Secondary 3D Display or Primary 3D and Secondary 2D Display to
enable it. Your selection depends on which device you want to enable, and which
one supports 3D.

30
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

Note: if both of your displays are 3D devices, you can only enable 3D on
one of the two devices in dual preview mode.

Zoom In/Out
When you place media on the timeline, use the Fit* drop-down underneath the
preview window to zoom in or out on the video. Zooming in is useful for precise
placement of media, while zooming out lets you add media that begins off screen.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Undocking the Preview Window

Click the button to undock the preview window. Once undocked, you can
preview your production at full screen or move it to an extended desktop. You can
also resize the timeline and library window to your liking.
Once undocked, you can:

click or to view your production at full screen.

click to minimize the preview window, and hide it so you can edit more
freely. Click on next to the PowerDirector logo to show the minimized
preview window.

click on to re-dock the preview window.

Previewing in 3D Mode
In the preview window you can enable 3D* mode to view the media in your
production in 3D, while you work.
Note: for detailed information on adding and setting the source format of 3D
media, see 3D Media. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
Check the version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

3D Configuration
Before you can enable 3D mode, you must first set your 3D display device.

31
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

To set your 3D display device, do this:

1. Select the 3D configuration menu underneath the preview window .

2. Select one of the following options:
select your 3D display type from the list, i.e. 3D-Ready HDTV (Checkerboard),
Micro-polarizer LCD 3D (Row-Interleaved), 120Hz Time-sequential 3D LCD,
HDMI 1.4 Enabled 3D TV, etc.
if you are not sure which type of 3D display you have, select the Auto Detect
3D Mode option to have CyberLink PowerDirector detect it for you.
if you do not have a 3D display, select Anaglyph Red/Cyan mode and then use
anaglyphic (red/cyan) 3D glasses to view 3D content.

Enabling 3D Mode
Once you have set your 3D display device, you can enable 3D mode at any time to
preview your video production in 3D. To enable, just click the button.
Note: any 2D media in your production will not display in 3D. However, you
can convert all of the 2D media to 3D using TrueTheater 3D in Power Tools.
See Power Tools: 2D to 3D for more information.

To disable 3D mode, just click the button.

Editing Workspace
The editing workspace is where you create your project by adding your media,
various effects, transitions, and title effects. The editing workspace has two
different views, the timeline and storyboard views, which are accessed by clicking
the or button.
Note: you can set which workspace view is displayed by default in Editing
Preferences.

32
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

Timeline View
The timeline view lets you view your entire project based on running time. This
view is useful if you want to insert effects, subtitles, etc. at a specific moment in
production. The timeline view also provides a view of all the tracks, media, and
other content (chapter markers, subtitle markers) that are displayed in the timeline.

To switch to timeline view, click .

Timeline Tracks
The timeline contains the following tracks:

Track Description
Video tracks contain your project's media clips (video clips and
images) and effects (PiP objects, particle effects, title effects, etc.)
on the timeline. By default, there are two video tracks in the
timeline, but you can have up to 100 video tracks by adding more
in the Track Manager. Each video track in the timeline may have
an associated audio track for the video clip's audio.
Audio tracks contain the audio in your project. The audio may be
the audio portion of a video clip on the video track, or a separate
audio track for music clips or other audio. By default there are
two audio tracks linked with a video track, and a separate audio
track for music, which is always the bottom track in the timeline.
You can have up to 100 audio tracks by adding more in the Track
Manager.
The effect track contains any special effects that you want to
apply to your final video. Video effects in the effect track are
applied to all the video tracks that are positioned above it in the
timeline.
The title track contains the text title effects that appear in your
project. The titles you add to this track display over all the
content in every video track that display during their duration.
The voice track contains a narrative voice-over or other audio
clips.
The music track contains your video's soundtrack.

33
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

The chapter track contains all of the chapter markers in your

current video production. This track displays when you are in the
Chapter Room. Right-click on the timeline and then select Show
Chapter Track if you always want this track to display in the
timeline.
The subtitle track contains all of the subtitle markers in your
current video production. This track displays when you are in the
Subtitle Room. Right-click on the timeline and then select Show
Subtitle Track if you always want this track to display in the
timeline.
The SVRT track displays the Intelligent SVRT information for your
current project. See Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for more
information. Right-click on the timeline and then select Show
SVRT Track if you always want this track to display in the
timeline.
When using the Music Beat Detection feature, the music beat
track is enabled. This track displays all of the music beat markers
for the music in your production. See Music Beat Detection for
more information. Right-click on the timeline and then select
Show Music Beat Track if you always want this track to display in
the timeline.

Timeline Behavior
The CyberLink PowerDirector timeline has several behavior features that make it
easy to manage media on the timeline.
On the timeline you can:
place media clips at any position on a video track. If no media is placed
before a media clip on the timeline, your video production displays a black
screen until the timeline position of your media clip is reached.
media clips will snap to other clips on the timeline for easy placement in your
production. If want to move the clips more freely on the timeline, you can
disable snap to clips in Editing Preferences.
hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and select multiple media clips on
the timeline.

34
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

click and drag the mouse to select multiple media clips on the timeline.
right-click on select media in the timeline and select Group Objects. Doing
this allows you to move all the selected media clips as a group. Select
Ungroup Objects to once again allow for individual media clip movement.
Note: you cannot include transitions in grouped objects.

Timeline Ruler
You can resize the timeline ruler for a more expanded or condensed view of your
production. To resize the ruler, click on the ruler and drag it left or right.

Expanding the ruler is especially handy when aligning clips and effects, while
condensing it gives you a global overview of your entire production.

Click to auto fit your current project in the timeline area if you want to view the
entire movie in the editing workspace. You can also right-click on the timeline ruler
and select View Entire Movie to do this. Or select Zoom In or Zoom Out to change
the view to your required size.

Use the timeline ruler slider located in the bottom left corner
to manually resize the timeline.

Timeline Markers
You can add timeline markers* to the timeline ruler for more precise media
placement on the timeline. Once added, media clips snap to the timeline markers,
allowing your media to appear in your video production at the exact moment you
want it.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

35
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Adding Timeline Markers

To add a timeline marker, do this:
1. Hover your mouse over the timeline ruler. The green timeline marker indicator
displays with the displayed time.

Note: use the timeline ruler to expand the timeline for a more precise
placement of timeline markers.

2. Once you have found the time where you want to place the timeline, right-
click on the ruler and then select Add Timeline Marker.
3. Input a Note for the new timeline marker, if required.
4. Click on OK to add the new timeline marker.

Once a timeline marker is added, media will snap to it when added to a track in the
timeline.

Note: you can manually drag a timeline marker to different position if the
original is not in the exact location you wanted it. Expand the timeline ruler
for a more precise placement, if necessary.

Right-click on the timeline ruler and then select Edit Timeline Markers to view a list
of all the timeline markers you have added. In this list you can remove any of the
existing markers, or double-click in the Note column to edit the associated text.

36
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

Function Buttons
When you select media that is on the timeline, whether it's a video clip, image,
audio clip, effect, title effect, etc., several function buttons display above the
timeline. These buttons let you perform a variety of tasks or gain access to some
important features of CyberLink PowerDirector.
The function buttons that are available depend on the type of media content you
select. However, whenever you select media, the and buttons are

always displayed. Click to remove the selected media content from the
timeline, or to gain access to more timeline functions, which vary
depending on the selected media.

Magic Tools

When editing your video project in the timeline, you can click the button
to use the magic tools to edit and touch up your audio, video, and image clips.
Magic tools can also help you add a creative style to your video production or add
the right background music.
CyberLink PowerDirector offers the following magic tools:
Magic Movie Wizard: automatically creates an edited video blended with
stylish effects and transitions.
Magic Fix: fixes and enhances your photos and videos, including fixing shaky
video, enhancing video quality, removing red-eye, and enhancing the focus
on photos.
Magic Motion: applies zooms and pans to your images. You can also use the
Magic Motion Designer to manually customize motion on an image.
Magic Cut: condenses long video segments into shorter clips that contain
only the best moments.
Magic Style: creates professional videos with pre-designed style templates
automatically.
Magic Music*: adds background music that automatically adjusts to suit
different durations.

37
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Click on the button within these tools to consult the iHelp for assistance on
using them.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Range Selection
Click and drag one of the arrows on either side of the timeline slider to select a
range* of media on the timeline.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Once selected, right click on the selection, select Loop Playback, and then click the
play button if you want to continuously play back of the selected range. You can
also cut or copy the range, and then paste it to another position on the timeline.
You can also use this feature to manually highlight a portion of a clip that you want
to then remove or trim out.
Click Render Preview to have CyberLink PowerDirector render a video preview of
only the highlighted range for playback in the preview window. Click Produce
Range to produce just the selected range in the Produce window, outputting it as a
video file that will be added to the media library.
Click Lock Range if you want to lock the selected range. Once locked, you can
more easily preview and even add additional media into the range for previewing,
rendering, or producing. Click Lock Range again to unlock the selected range.

Track Manager
In the Track Manager* you can add additional video and audio tracks to the
timeline. You can have up to 100 video tracks (with or without an audio track) in the

38
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

timeline, or add up to 98 additional audio tracks.

Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Adding Tracks to Timeline

Each video track you add, adds another layer of PiP video on the tracks above it in
the timeline.
To add tracks to the timeline, do this:
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector auto adds a video and audio track for you
when all the current video/audio tracks in the timeline have media on them.

1. In the timeline view, click on to open the Track Manager.

2. In the Video section, enter in the number of video tracks you want to add to
the timeline. By default, one track is added, but you can add up to 98 video
tracks (100 in total) to the timeline, as required.
Note: if you don't want your additional video tracks to have a track for its
audio, enter in 0 tracks in the Audio section.

3. In the Video section, select the Position in the timeline where you want to add
the tracks.
4. In the Audio section, enter in the number of audio tracks you want to add to
the timeline. By default, one track is added, but you can add up to 98 audio
tracks (100 in total) to the timeline, as required.
Note: if you only want to add an audio track (i.e. without a linked video
track), enter in 0 tracks in the Video section.

5. In the Audio section, select the Position in the timeline where you want to
add the tracks.
6. Click on OK to add the tracks to the timeline.
To quickly remove any unwanted tracks from the timeline, just right-click on the
timeline and then select Remove Empty Tracks.

39
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Customizing Timeline Tracks

In CyberLink PowerDirector you can customize the layout of the workspace
timeline and its tracks to fit your preference.

Customizing Track Names

To make it easy to identify all of your tracks if you have lots of media on multiple
tracks, drag the left sidebar to reveal the track names.

You can give all the tracks in the timeline a custom name as required.

Reordering Tracks
You can reorder the video tracks in the timeline if required. To reorder, click on the
left sidebar and drag the track to the new position in the timeline.

40
 Po w erDirecto r Wo rkspace

You can also drag the effect track to a new position in the timeline. Effects on the
effect track are applied to all video tracks that are positioned above it in the
timeline.

Adjusting Track Height

Click and drag the bottom of a track on the left sidebar to resize it to your
preference.

You can also right-click on the timeline and select Adjust Video Track Height to
adjust the height of all the video tracks in the timeline to one of the default sizes.
Select Adjust Audio Track Height to resize all of the audio tracks, including the
music track, voice track, and each video track's corresponding audio track.

41
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Locking/Unlocking Tracks
To lock a track in the timeline, click at the left of the track. When a track is
locked, you cannot add new clips to the track, or move or edit the clips it contains.
To unlock a track in the timeline, click to the left of the track.

Enable/Disable Tracks
To disable a track in the timeline*, deselect to the left of the track. When a track
is disabled, the media it contains is not displayed in the Preview window. This
allows you to preview your project by tracks so you can concentrate on the track
you are working on.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To enable a track in the timeline, select to the left of the track.

Storyboard View
The storyboard view is essentially a large graphical display, or storyboard, of all
your video clips and images on the first track in the timeline. You can use it to
visualize the main scenes and overall production more clearly.

To switch to storyboard view, click .

Note: some features are unavailable in the storyboard view. If you try to
perform a function that is unavailable, the program switches back to the
timeline view.

42
 Po w erDirecto r Pro jects

Chapter 4:

PowerDirector Projects
When working on a new video production, click the button to save it as a .pds
file, a project file format that is used exclusively by CyberLink PowerDirector. These
project files can be imported directly into the timeline, if required. See Importing
PowerDirector Projects for more information.
Note: a CyberLink PowerDirector project (.pds) file essentially contains a
list of the media clips and effects used in your project, and a log of all the
edits you want to make to your media. Project files do not include the media
clips in them. If you want to save all your video production files in one place,
use the Pack Project Materials function. To do this select, File > Pack
Project M aterials from the menu.
Use the options in the File menu to save, create new, or open existing projects in
CyberLink PowerDirector. When you create a new project, CyberLink PowerDirector
resets your media library. If you want to create a new video production using the
same media currently in your library, select File > New Workspace.
Note: saved PowerDirector projects are now easily accessible in the media
library, and they are also reusable. See Reusing PowerDirector Projects for
more information.

If you have a CyberLink Cloud subscription you can upload saved projects and
more to CyberLink Cloud*. See CyberLink Cloud Projects for more information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

The changes you make to your media in CyberLink PowerDirector do not affect the
original media you imported into the program. Since your edits are all saved in the
project file, you can trim, edit, or remove clips, but still keep your original files on
your hard drive, untouched. So let yourself get creative. If you end up changing
things too drastically, you can always start over.

Setting Project Aspect Ratio

To set the aspect ratio for your project, and your outputted video, select 4:3 or 16:9
from the aspect ratio drop-down at the top of the window.

43
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

The preview window changes according to the aspect ratio you select. See
Adjusting Video Clip Aspect Ratio for information on modifying the aspect ratio of
a media file in your library.

Exporting Projects
You can export your CyberLink PowerDirector projects by writing them to a DV
tape, or by packing all the materials in a folder on your computer's hard drive or
CyberLink Cloud*. Exported projects can then be imported into another computer
running CyberLink PowerDirector.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To export your project to a DV tape select File > Export > Write to DV Tape. To
export it to a folder select File > Pack Project Materials. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can select File > Pack Project Materials and Upload to
CyberLink Cloud to back up all the media files, and the project file, in a folder on
CyberLink Cloud.

Reusing PowerDirector Projects

All projects created in CyberLink PowerDirector are now reusable, allowing you to
use them as templates for your future productions. To access all your saved
projects, make sure you are in the Media Room, and then do either of the
following:

click to open the explorer view and then click Projects.

select Projects from the Media Content drop-down.

44
 Po w erDirecto r Pro jects

Note: to play back a saved project, just double-click on it in the media

library.

To reuse a saved project, just select it in the media library and then drag and drop it
to a desired position on the timeline. You can also insert the saved project
anywhere within your current project, by dragging and dropping it to the desired
position on the timeline.
Note: when you add a saved project to the timeline, all of its media is
automatically added back into the media library.

Once the saved project is in the timeline, you can simply replace all of the existing
media clips, templates, and effects with the content you want to use in your new
production. To do this, just drag the media clips/effects/templates to the desired
positions on the timeline, hovering over the clip/effect/template you want to
replace, drop it, and then select Replace. This replaces the current content with the
new content you want to add, without changing the structure of the project.

45
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

46
 Po w erDirecto r Pro jects

Note: if a media clip you are replacing is shorter than a newly added video/
audio clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically trims the video/audio
clip to fit the space. For all other media clips, CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically resizes them to fit the original clip's duration.

CyberLink Cloud Projects

If you have a CyberLink Cloud subscription you can select File > Upload Project to
CyberLink Cloud to store project files on the CyberLink Cloud* service from
CyberLink.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To download a project that was saved on CyberLink Cloud, including projects that
were packed in a folder with their media (materials), select Download Project from
CyberLink Cloud from the File menu. In the window that displays, select a project
and then click Download.
Note: when you open a packed project stored on CyberLink Cloud, the
project file and all the project media is downloaded to your local computer
and stored in the download folder specified in CyberLink Cloud Preferences
.

47
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

48
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

Chapter 5:

Importing Media into

PowerDirector
You can import media in a wide variety of formats into CyberLink PowerDirector, in
many different ways. Whether you need to capture media from external sources,
import media that is already on your computer's hard drive, or download it from
the Internet., CyberLink PowerDirector makes it easy to get all your media into the
program quickly, so you can start working on your video production.
Note: media you import is saved in the current CyberLink PowerDirector
project you are working on. If you create a new project, you will be asked if
you want to merge the media in your library into the new project. You can
also select File > New Workspace to create a new project, while
maintaining the current media in the library.

Importing Media Files

If you already have video, audio, and image files that you want to use in your
production on your computer's hard drive, you can import the files directly into
CyberLink PowerDirector's media library in the Media Room. You can also import
media files that are on a removable device.
Note: if you import media files that are on a removable device into the
media library, they will be removed if the removable device is
disconnected. For best results, it is recommended that you copy the media
to your computer's hard drive before importing.
CyberLink PowerDirector supports the following file formats:
Note: for a more complete and up-to-date list of the supported file formats,
and supported devices, please visit out web site: http://www.cyberlink.com/
products/powerdirector-ultimate/spec_en_US.html.

Image: Animated-GIF, BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TIFF

3D Image Format: JPS*, MPO*
CyberLink PowerDirector also supports the import of the following camera RAW
image formats, which are then converted to JPEG once imported: ARW (SONY), CR2
(Canon), DNG (Ricoh), ERF (Epson), KDC (Kodak), MRW (Konica Minolta), NEF (Nikon),

49
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

NRW (Nikon), ORF (OLYMPUS), PEF (Pentax), RAF (Fujifilm), RW2 (Panasonic), SR2
(SONY), SRF (SONY)

Video: 3GPP2, AVI, DAT, DivX**, DV-AVI, DVR-MS*, FLV (H.264), HD MPEG-2, M2T*,
MKV (H.264, H.265), MOD*, MOV, MOV (H.264), MP4, MPEG-1*, MPEG-2*, MPEG-4
AVC (H.264)*, MPEG-4 HEVC (H.265)*, MTS*, TOD*, VOB*, VRO*, WMV, WMV-HD,
WTV*, XAVC S*
Note: ** to enable, you must download the DivX codec online. Available on
Windows 32bit only.

3D Video Format: Dual-stream AVI, MVC*, Side-by-Side Video*, Over/Under Video

Audio: ALAC, M4A, MP3, OGG, WAV, WMA

Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To import media into CyberLink PowerDirector, click and then select one of the
following options:
Import Media Files: import media files individually.
Import a Media Folder: import the entire contents of a folder that contains the
media files you want to use in your current project.
Note: you can also drag and drop media onto the CyberLink PowerDirector
window to import it into the program.

3D Media
CyberLink PowerDirector supports various 3D* video and image formats. You can
use 3D media to create both 3D videos, and standard 2D video productions. All 3D
media in the library is indicated by a 3D icon in the top left of its thumbnail.

Note: click the button to enable 3D mode to view the 3D content during
the editing process. For more information on enabling 3D mode and
configuring your 3D display settings, see Previewing in 3D Mode. * Optional
feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web
site for detailed versioning information.
You can use and arrange 3D video clips and images in your video productions the
same way you use 2D media. However, note that if you want to create a 3D video

50
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

production, any 2D media in your project must be converted to 3D before

production. See PowerTools: 2D to 3D for more information.

Setting 3D Source Format

When 3D media is imported into the media library, you may need to set the format
of the 3D source video. This is because 3D media comes in a variety of different
video source formats. CyberLink PowerDirector needs to know the source format of
each 3D media file so that it can display it properly in 3D.
Note: if you want to use 3D video clips and images in a 2D video
production, you still need to set the correct 3D source format to ensure the
media displays properly in 2D. CyberLink PowerDirector will incorporate
the specified eye frames into your 2D video.
To set the 3D source format of your 3D media, do this:
1. Right-click on a 3D media file in the media library and then select Set 3D
Source Format. If the media file is on the timeline, right-click on it, select Set
Clip Attributes, and then Set 3D Source Format. The Set 3D Source Format
window displays.
2. Select the 3D source format by selecting one of the following:
Auto Detect 3D Source Format: if you are not sure what the source format is
of your 3D video, click this button to have CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically detect and set it for you.
2D: select this option if the selected media file is actually 2D content.
Side by side format: select this option if the 3D content has two different
images side by side. CyberLink PowerDirector merges the two images to
produce the 3D effect.
Over/Under format: select this option if the 3D content has two different
video images, one on top of the other. CyberLink PowerDirector merges the
two images to produce the 3D effect.
Multiview video coding: select this option if the 3D content is in the MVC
video format (.mts or .m2ts file format).

Dual view format: select this option if the 3D content is in the dual view
source format (.avi file format).
3. From the drop-down available, Specify whether to display the left or right eye

51
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

frame first. Use this feature if while editing or playing back 3D content you
begin to feel uncomfortable or uneasy. This may be because the layout of the
3D image is displayed differently than most standard content. If this occurs,
try selecting the opposite eye view. This switches the way the 3D content is
displayed on your display device, and may reduce the discomfort.
4. Click OK to set your changes to the selected media file.

The Difference Between 3D and 3D-Like

Effects
In supported versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, there are both 3D effects* and
effects that have "3D-Like" properties.
Like 3D media that can be imported into the library, 3D effects* are composed of
two images from slightly different perspectives. 3D effects have one image for the
left eye, and one image for the right eye. When these images are viewed together
with compatible 3D hardware and software, they produce an effect that gives the
perception of depth. In supported versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, you can
enable this type of 3D effect for PiP media, particle effects, title effects, and on disc
menus. The video effects and transitions indicated with the 3D icon on their
thumbnail, also have these 3D effect properties when viewed and included in 3D
video productions.
Some title effects, transitions, and other features in CyberLink PowerDirector have
3D-Like properties. Available in all versions of the program, these effects are simply
3D animations that only consist of one image. 3D-Like effects do not produce a 3D
depth effect when viewed in 3D mode.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Importing PowerDirector Projects

CyberLink PowerDirector projects (.pds files) you worked on and saved previously
can be imported and then directly inserted into your video production's timeline.
To do this, select File > Insert Project from the menu. All of the media in the
original project will be imported into the current project's media library, and also
inserted at the current position of the timeline slider.

52
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

Capturing Media
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you capture media from a variety of sources directly
into the media library. Click the Capture button to enter the Capture module.

In the Capture module, the program appears as follows:

A - Ca pture from a DV Ca m corder, B - Ca pture from a n HDV Ca m corder, C - Ca pture from a TV Signa l,
D - Ca pture from a Digita l TV Signa l, E - Ca pture from a Webca m , F - Ca pture from a M icrophone, G -
Ca pture from a CD, H - Ca pture from a n Externa l or Optica l Device, I - Ca pture Preview Window , J -
Ca ptured Content, K - Qua lity Profile Setup, L - Ca pture Settings (Drive), M - Ca pture Pla yer Controls,
N - Ca pture Preferences

Capturing from a DV Camcorder

You can capture video content that you recorded with a DV camcorder. Use the
capture from a DV camcorder option only if your camcorder connects to your
computer using an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) cable. You can capture a single scene or a
number of scenes in a batch from your camcorder.

53
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: to add a text remark, date, or timecode to the video you are capturing,
click on the button in capture preferences area to enable it. See
Capture Preferences for more information.
If your DV camcorder connects to your computer via a USB connection, just import
the video files directly from your camcorder, as if it was another hard drive on your
computer. See Importing Media for information on importing video files from your
computer.

Capturing a Single Scene

You can capture a single segment of video from your camcorder using the capture
player controls (record, stop, fast forward, rewind, etc.) underneath the capture
preview window. This function is particularly useful, for example, if you want to
acquire a long video segment in its entirety without skipping over sections.

DV Backup
The DV Backup* feature lets you back up the digital video from your DV camcorder
directly to DVD using CyberLink PowerDirector.

Insert a blank DVD disc into your disc drive and then click the button to
begin backing up your video.
Note: this feature requires a DVD burner. * Optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.

Batch Capture from a DV Camcorder

With Batch Capture, CyberLink PowerDirector scans your DV camcorder for intervals
or scenes (or allows you to set them manually) on the tape, and then captures these
scenes as separate video files and imports each of them into the program.

Automatic Batch Capture

If you want CyberLink PowerDirector to auto capture and import each of the
intervals/scenes on your DV camcorder, click the button on the DV

54
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

Camcorder tab.
An interval/scene is the content you recorded each time you pressed record and
then stop during the video shooting process. For help on using this function, use
the tips on the user interface.

Manual Batch Capture

Using manual batch capture* gives you more control over the capturing process
and ensures that the scenes you want to include are captured. Manual batch
capture is recommended when you know which scenes you want to capture and
have a good idea where they are located on the tape.

Click the button to access the manual batch capture feature. For help on
using this function, use the helpful tips on the user interface.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Capturing from an HDV Camcorder

You can capture video footage you shot with an HDV* camcorder. Use the capture
from an HDV camcorder option only if your camcorder connects to your computer
using an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) cable. To a capture scene from your HDV camcorder,
use the capture player controls (record, stop, fast forward, rewind, etc.) underneath
the capture preview window.
If your HDV camcorder connects to your computer via a USB connection, just
import the video files directly from your camcorder, as if it was another hard drive
on your computer. See Importing Media for information on importing video files
from your computer.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Capturing from a TV Signal

If your computer has a TV* tuner card installed and you want to capture segments
from your favorite programs, select this option. To capture, use the capture player
controls (record, stop, change channel, etc.) underneath the capture preview

55
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

window.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Capturing from a Digital TV Signal

If your computer has a TV tuner card installed that receives a digital* TV signal and
you want to capture segments from your favorite programs, select this option. To
capture, use the capture player controls (record, stop, change channel, etc.)
underneath the capture preview window.
Note: this feature is not available in all regions. * Optional feature in
CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for
detailed versioning information.

Capturing from a Webcam

You can record live content with a webcam that is attached to your computer and
then import it directly into your CyberLink PowerDirector media library. To capture,
use the capture player controls (record, stop, etc.) underneath the capture preview
window.

Capturing from a Microphone

Select this option to record audio with a microphone that is attached to your
computer. To capture, use the capture player controls (record, stop, etc.)
underneath the capture preview window.

Capturing from a CD
Use this option to rip your favorite music, or other audio, from an audio CD. To
capture, use the capture player controls (record, play, stop, next/previous track,
etc.) underneath the capture preview window.

Capturing from an AVCHD Camcorder

You can capture video content that is on an external device, such as an AVCHD
camcorder. Use the capture from an AVCHD camcorder option only if your
camcorder connects to your computer using an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) cable. To a
capture scene from your AVCHD camcorder, use the capture player controls

56
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

(record, stop, etc.) underneath the capture preview window.

If your AVCHD camcorder connects to your computer via a USB connection, just
import the video files directly from your camcorder, as if it was another hard drive
on your computer. See Importing Media for information on importing video files
from your computer.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Capturing from an Optical Device

You can capture content from an optical device, such as video scenes from a DVD.
To capture, use the capture player controls (record, play, stop, next/previous frame,
etc.) underneath the capture preview window. You can also use the DVD disc
structure tree to quickly select the titles and chapters you want to capture.
Note: some DVDs are protected by technology that does not allow you to
capture the content they contain. * Optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.

Captured Content
All of the media you capture in the capture window is displayed in the Captured
Content area. When you return to the Edit module, all of the media is automatically
imported into your media library.
In the Captured Content area you can right-click on media to perform a number of
options, including detecting scenes in video clips and deleting unwanted content
so that it won't import into the Edit module.
The content captured in CyberLink PowerDirector is stored in the folder noted
underneath the Captured Content area. If you want to store it in a different location,
click the Change Folder button and select a different folder.

Quality Profile Setup

To set the file format and quality of the media you capture, click the Profile button.
If this button is grayed out, that means that the original format and quality of the
media is maintained, as set on the original media device (camcorder, etc.).
The profile settings that are available depend on the capture device connected and

57
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

the capture mode you have selected.

Capture Settings
Use the Settings button to configure the set up of your selected capture device. The
capture settings that are available depend on the capture device connected and the
capture mode you have selected.
Note: when capturing from a DVD, this button reads Drive, allowing you to
select the specific disc drive you want to capture from.

Capture Preferences
Before capturing media, you can set the preferences for your captured content. The
capture preferences that are available, depend on the content you are capturing.
Set the capture preferences as follows:

to set a maximum capture length, select Time limit and then enter a time in
the timecode box.
to set a maximum captured file size, select Size limit and then enter a size
limit (in MB).
to add a text remark, date stamp, or time stamp to the video being captured,
click on the button. In the Add Text Overlay window, select which type
and display format of text overlay you want to include on your recorded
video on the Text tab. Select the Format tab to set the font and text position
for the text.
to take a still photo of a frame of video for use in your project, just click on
at the point where you want to take the snapshot. The image is saved to
the Captured content area. You can specify your preferred snapshot image file
format in preferences. See File Preferences for detailed information.
select Non real-time when capturing from a camcorder to continue
processing captured video after the original video stops playing in order to
ensure that no frames are dropped.
select Begin with fade-in to add fade-in to audio captured with a microphone.
select End with fade-out to add fade-out to audio captured with a
microphone.

58
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

select Record at maximum speed to record CD audio at a higher speed.

Capturing at a higher speed reduces processing time, but yields audio of a
lower quality.

Downloading Media
If you feel that you do not have enough media for your project, or you are looking
for specific media to make your creation just perfect, in the Edit module you can
download media from Flickr, DirectorZone, and CyberLink Cloud* into the media
room library.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To display all the current downloaded media in the media library, select
Downloaded from the Media Content drop-down.

Downloading Photos From Flickr

You can download your own photos directly from your account on Flickr into
CyberLink PowerDirector. You can also search for and browse other user’s photos
from within CyberLink PowerDirector, and then import them into your media
library for use in a project.
To download photos from Flickr, do this:

1. Click on and then select Download Photos from Flickr.

2. Follow the steps in the wizard window to authorize CyberLink PowerDirector
to use your Flickr account and accept the Terms of Use from Flickr.

59
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: having a Flickr account is not required to search for, browse, and
download photos from Flickr.

3. Select from the drop-down whether to search for photos from:

My Photos on Flickr: this option displays thumbnails of all the photos you
have uploaded to your Flickr account.
My Contacts' Photos: this option displays thumbnails of all the photos your
Flickr contacts have uploaded to Flickr.
Search for Photos on Flickr: select this option to perform a search for photos
on Flickr.
Note: use the drop-down filter menu at the top of the search window to sort
the photos.

4. Select all of the photos that you want to import into your media library and
then click on the Download button.
Note: you cannot use the photos downloaded into your media library for
commercial use. Click on the button underneath a photo thumbnail to
view its copyright information.

Downloading Content from

DirectorZone/CyberLink Cloud
You can download templates and effects created by CyberLink and other
PowerDirector users from DirectorZone. Users that have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription can also download any effects and templates you backed up on
CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Downloading Effects and Templates from

DirectorZone
If you are looking for additional PiP objects, paint animation objects, title effects,
particle effects, or disc menu templates for your library, you can click Download
Templates to download them directly from the DirectorZone web site in to the PiP

60
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

Objects Room, Particle Room, Title Room, or Create Disc module.

When in the Edit module's Media Room, you can download sound clips into the
media library. To do this, click on and then select Download Sound Clips from
DirectorZone.
Visit the DirectorZone web site for more information: www.directorzone.com.

My DirectorZone Templates
In the My DirectorZone window you can conveniently download your custom PiP
object, paint animation object, title effect, particle effect, and disc menu templates
that you previously uploaded to DirectorZone. You can also access and download
templates from your DirectorZone download history and also your favorite
templates.
To download My DirectorZone templates, do this:

1. Click in the PiP Objects Room, Particle Room, Title Room, or Create Disc
module.
2. Click the My DirectorZone tab.
3. Filter the templates by My Uploads, Download History, or My Favorites, or
enter a search keyword in the field provided.
4. Select all of the templates you want to download.
5. Click Download to download them to your computer and import them into
the library.

Downloading Effects and Templates from

CyberLink Cloud
If you have a CyberLink Cloud subscription you can download the PiP object, paint
animation, title effect, particle effect, and disc menu templates you previously
backed up to CyberLink Cloud. Once downloaded, these templates are stored in the
download folder specified in CyberLink Cloud Preferences, and imported into your
media library.
To download template from CyberLink Cloud, do this:

61
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

1. Click in the PiP Objects Room, Particle Room, Title Room, or Create Disc
module.
2. Click the My CyberLink Cloud tab.
3. Filter the templates by selecting a collection from the drop-down, or enter a
search keyword in the field provided.
4. Select all of the templates you want to download.
5. Click Download to download them to your computer and import them into
the library.

Detecting Scenes and Extracting

Audio
To assist with the editing process, CyberLink PowerDirector can detect scenes in
your video clips or extract the audio from them. These new clips are displayed,
separately from the original clips, in the media library.

Detecting Scenes in a Video Clip

The scene detection function automatically creates individual clips based on the
individual scenes (or pre-edited shots) contained within a video clip. Detected
scenes are not split from the original clip, but can be added to the workspace like
any other media clip.
Note: depending on the file format, scene detection on certain clips may not
work as precisely as it does for others. You may need to split the scenes
manually in the Scene Detection window.

To detect the scenes in a video clip, do this:

1. Right-click on it in either the Captured Content area (Capture window), or in
the media library, and then select Detect Scenes.
2. The scenes in the video clip are automatically detected and then displayed in
the Scenes panel.
3. Once you are done detecting the scenes in the video clip, click OK. The
detected clips are displayed in a sub folder under the original video clip.
When using scene detection, please note:

62
 Im po rting M edia into Po w erDirecto r

if required, use the Sensitivity slider to increase or decrease scene detection

sensitivity. Doing this may yield an increased or decreased number of scenes
that are detected. Click Detect to redetect the scenes in the video clip. You are
asked to confirm the clearing of the previously detected clips and then the
updated scenes are detected and displayed in the Scenes panel.

click on the button to configure the Advanced Scene Detection Settings.

If the selected video clip is a DV-AVI file, you have the option to Detect by
change of video frame (used on all other file formats) or Detect by change of
timecodes (i.e.: timecodes are automatically set when you start and stop
recording). Select the Disable preview during detection option to speed up
the detection process if you find your computer runs slow during the
process.
to stop the scene detection process before completion, click the stop button
on the playback controls.
to detect scenes manually, drag the slider (in Clip mode) to the beginning of
each new scene and then click .
to preview a detected scene, just select it in the Scenes panel (ensure Segment
is selected) and then click the play button.
to view all the detected scene markers on the clip timeline, ensure that Clip is
selected.
to merge two or more detected scenes into one longer scene, select them in
the Scenes panel and then click Merge. Click Remove All if you want to
restore the clip to the original.
You can add the individual scenes to the timeline or manage them in the media
library like any other video clip.
Video clips that contain detected scenes show a small folder icon in the lower right
corner of the clip when displayed in the media library. To display a clip’s scenes,
click the folder icon.

63
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Extracting Audio from a Video Clip

If you just want to use the audio from a video clip in your production, you can
extract it in the media library by right-clicking on it and selecting Extract Audio.
The audio is separated from the video and saved in the media library. You can use it
in your project like any other audio file.
Note: when a video clip is already on the timeline, you can separate the
audio from the video file by right-clicking on it and selecting Unlink Video
and Audio.

64
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

Chapter 6:

PowerDirector Plug-ins
CyberLink PowerDirector includes a number of plug-ins that can help you create
video content for your production. Click the button above the Media Room
library in the Edit module to view the available PowerDirector plug-ins.
Currently, CyberLink PowerDirector includes the two plug-ins. See the following
two sections for detailed information:
Using the MultiCam Designer*
Using the Theme Designer*
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Using the MultiCam Designer

The MultiCam Designer lets you seamlessly edit footage from multiple cameras,
simulating the use of a live camera switcher. The MultiCam Designer* creates
professional-looking edited content for use in your CyberLink PowerDirector
projects.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To open the MultiCam Designer click the button and then select MultiCam
Designer.
Note: when entering the MultiCam Designer, any selected video files are
automatically imported into the available camera (video source) areas.

65
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

A - Im port Video, B - Ava ila ble Ca m era s (Video Sources), C - Im port Audio, D - Synchroniza tion Type,
E - Selected Ca m era (Video Source), F - Recording Tra ck, G - Recording/Pla yba ck Controls, H - Audio
Source, I - Recorded Content, J - Ava ila ble Audio Source, K - Source Tra cks

Importing Media
In the MultiCam Designer you can have up to four different video sources from four
different cameras. Each available camera (video source) can have more than one
imported video clip on its source video track.
Note: if you require more than four video sources for your production, you
can use Sync by Audio to align them on the timeline and then edit the
footage manually. See Syncing Clips by Audio for more information.

You can also import one or more audio files to use as the source audio in the clip
you are recording.

66
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

Importing Video Clips

When you enter the MultiCam Designer, any video clips that were selected in the
media library are automatically imported into the empty camera (video source)
areas and the corresponding source video tracks.
If no clips were selected, you are prompted to select clips from your hard drive for
import. You can select multiple video clips for import. Each selected clip is placed
in the next available camera area. Once all the camera areas are full, the next clip is
imported into the first camera area, after (on the corresponding source video track)
the previously imported clip.

To import additional video clips, do either of the following:

click the Import Video button and then Import From Hard Drive to import
video clips from your computer's hard drive, or Import From Media Room to
import clips from the existing media in the Media Room library. Select one or
more clips and then click Open. The clips are placed in the next available
camera areas and the corresponding source video tracks.
Note: once all the available camera areas are full, the next clip is imported
into the first camera area, after (on the corresponding source video track)
the previously imported clip.

to import video clips into a specific camera (video source) area, click the
corresponding button. Next, select Import From Hard Drive to import
video clips from your computer's hard drive, or Import From Media Room to
import clips from the existing media in the Media Room library. Select one or
more clips and then click Open. The clips are placed in the camera area and
the corresponding source video tracks.

Source Video Tracks

All of the imported video clips are imported into the corresponding source video
tracks. You can move the video clips to different locations on the video tracks, or
even drag them to different tracks. You can also reorder the video clips on a source
track by clicking the button next to the track and then using the and
buttons to reorder them as required.

To remove a video clip from a source video track, click next to the track, select

67
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

the check box next to the clip you want to remove, and then click . To add
additional video clips to the source track, click the button.

Importing Audio Clips

If you want to use an audio clip as the audio source in your recording instead of the
audio of the imported video clips, you can import it separately into the MultiCam
Designer.
To import audio clips, click the Import Audio button and then Import From Hard
Drive to import audio clips from your computer's hard drive, or Import From
Media Room to import clips from the existing media in the Media Room library.
Select one or more clips and then click Open. The clips are placed on the source
audio track in the timeline.

Source Audio Track

All of the imported audio clips are imported into the source audio track. You can
move the audio clips to different locations on the audio track. You can also reorder
the audio clips on the source track by clicking the button next to the track and
then using the and buttons to reorder them as required.

To remove an audio clip from the source track, click next to the track, select the
check box next to the clip you want to remove, and then click . To add
additional audio clips to the source track, click the button.

Synchronizing Clips
Once you have imported all of the media clips into the MultiCam Designer that you
want to use in your recording, the next step is to synchronize them.
To synchronize the clips in the MultiCam Designer, do this:
1. Select the Audio source for your recording from the drop-down. You can use
the audio of any of the imported video clips or select Imported Audio to use
the audio that was imported on to the source audio track.
2. In the Synchronization drop-down, select one of the following:

68
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

Manual: select this option if you want to manually adjust the starting position
of each clip on the source tracks. You can do this by clicking and dragging
the clips on the source track to a new position.

Note: you can also click the button in the camera area to manually

move the clip on the source track back one frame. Click to move it
forward one frame.
Timecodes: select this option and then click Apply if you want the MultiCam
Designer to synchronize using the video clip's timecodes. The MultiCam
Designer will auto adjust the clips on the source tracks.
Note: this option can only be used if the video clips were recorded with a
DV or HDV camera that imprinted the timecode information in the clips and
were captured by CyberLink PowerDirector.

File Created Time: select this option and then click Apply to use the date and
time the file was created as the synchronization points. The MultiCam
Designer will auto adjust the clips on the source tracks.
Audio Analysis: select this option and then click Apply if you want the
MultiCam Designer to analyze the audio and then sync the files based on the
audio in them. The MultiCam Designer will auto adjust the clips on the source
tracks.
Markers on Clips: select this option and then use the playback controls to find
the synchronization points in each clip. Once you find a point, right click on
the source track and then select Set Marker. Once you have manually added
all the markers, click the Apply button. The MultiCam Designer will adjust the
clips on the source tracks.

Creating Recorded Content

Once you have imported and then synchronized all the media clips in the MultiCam
Designer, you are ready to record your video. The recorded video is placed on the
recording track and then is imported into the Edit module's timeline once you click
OK.
To record your content, do this:
1. Select the camera (video source) you want to start off the recording with. You
can do this by simply clicking on the camera preview area.

69
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

2. If required, click on in the recording controls to set the preview window

resolution. Select the Create Shadow File for HD Video option to also create
a shadow file for the recorded file. This can help speed up editing when using
high definition files in your production.

3. When you are ready, click to begin recording. The MultiCam Designer will
start recording, adding the current selected camera footage as recorded
content on the recording track.
4. As required during the recording process, click another camera (video source)
or use keyboard hotkeys 1-4 to switch the recording to that source's content.

5. Continue switching the camera (video source) as required, creating your

recorded content on the recording track.

70
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

6. When you are done click the or button to stop the recording process.
7. Click on OK to close the MultiCam Designer, and import the recorded content
into the timeline.
Note: if you'd like to modify the MultiCam Designer recorded content once it
is in the timeline, just select it and then click the M ultiCam Designer
button. See Changing the Recorded Content for more information.

Changing the Recorded Content

Once you have recorded your content in the MultiCam Designer and imported it
into the timeline, you can edit it like any other video clip on the timeline. However,
if you find that you want to replace some of the footage, or add more footage to
the recorded content, you can do this by re-entering the MultiCam Designer.
To change recorded content in the MultiCam Designer, click on it in the timeline
and then click on the MultiCam Designer function button.

Adding More Content

If required, you can record more content. You can record from the beginning over
the existing content, or continue from where you left off by using the playback
controls to find a specific starting point to record from. See Creating Recorded
Content for information on recording new content.
When you are done, click OK to save your changes and import the updated
recorded content into the timeline.

Replacing Existing Content

If you want to replace an existing segment on the recording track, do this:
1. Use the playback controls to find the segment you want to replace.
2. If you only want to replace part of a segment, you can split it into two
separate segments. To do this, ensure the timeline slider is at the starting
position of the part you want to replace, and then click Split.

71
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

3. Right-click on the camera segment you want to replace, and then select
another camera (video source).

4. Repeat the above steps as required to edit and replace the segments.
5. When you are done, click OK to save your changes and import the updated
recorded content into the timeline.

72
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

Using the Theme Designer

If you enjoy using the Magic Movie Wizard to create your video productions, you
can now fully customize the theme templates used to create these dynamic
looking videos in the Theme Designer*. A theme may consist of one or more theme
templates, or individual sequences from different theme templates.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

As you customize the theme template, you can also fully customize how your
media is displayed, giving you more creative control over your outputted movie.

To open the Theme Designer click the button and then select Theme Designer.

A - M edia Ta b, B - Effects Ta b, C - Sequence Content Area , D - Added Sequences Area , E - Selected

Sequence, F - Title Settings, G - Them e Ba ckground M usic, H - Sequence Ba ckground Im a ge, I -
Tra nsition Settings, J - Preview Window , K - Preview Controls, L - Auto Fill M edia Slots

73
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Overview
Themes that you edit in the Theme Designer consist of theme templates and your
media (images and video clips). The resulting video is similar to the movie content
created by the Magic Movie Wizard and Magic Style, but the Theme Designer
provides much more creative control over the outputted movie.

Theme Templates
Theme templates are used to create a video production, with a specific type of
theme or style, and can be downloaded from DirectorZone. Theme templates
consist of a number of sequences. Each of these sequences contain elements,
some of which are customizable and some of which are not.

The customizable elements include the text and media (images, videos, and
background music) you add to each sequence. You can add effects on this media
and set how and when it is displayed. You can also set the background image on
some sequences, and select the transition between each sequence in templates
named "with transitions". Non-customizable elements include any animation
included in the sequences.
When selecting a theme template to use in the Theme Designer, you can choose to
add one or more theme templates, creating a more original production. You can
even just select some of the sequences in a theme template, or mix and match the
sequences used.
There are three types of sequences: opening, middle, and closing sequences.
Opening and closing sequences usually contain text, while the elements in middle
sequences are much more random.

Adding Theme Templates/Sequences

In the Theme Designer you can use one or more theme templates, or just certain
selected sequences, to create your video.
When you first enter the Theme Designer, you are prompted to select a theme
template.

74
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

To add a theme template, just select it in the window and all of its sequences will
be added.

Note: you can preview a theme template in the preview window by selecting
it and then using the available playback controls.

75
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

If you don't want to use all the theme template's sequences, just deselect the ones
you don't want to use.

You can also select sequences from other theme templates and include them in
your video. The Theme Designer will remember the order of your selections.

76
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

Click OK once you have selected all the sequences. They will be loaded into the
added sequences area of the Theme Designer.

If you'd like to add more sequences, just click the button. You can drag and
drop the sequences to reorder them, or right click to remove the selected one.

Adding Media Clips

Once you have selected the theme templates (and their sequences) that you want
to use, you can start adding your images and video files to them.
Note: the number of media files you can add to a sequence is dependent on
its design.

To add media into the selected sequences, do this:

1. In the added sequences area, select the individual sequence you want to add
media to. Note the number of media slots that are available in the sequence
content area. The number of available slots varies from sequence to
sequence.

77
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: some of the media slots in sequences allow you to add both images
and videos into them, while others only allow one type of media.

2. C lick on the Media tab and then drag and drop the media that you
want in the sequence to the desired slot.
Note: the media that is available on the Media tab are the videos and
images you imported into the Media Room library. Click Import M edia to
import media from your computer's hard drive.
3. C ontinue this process until all the media slots have been used.

4. Select the next sequence, and then repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the
media slots have been filled.

78
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

Note: if you want a media file to continue playing from one sequence to the
next, ensure the Continue from last clip in the previous sequence is
selected. The first media slot will be auto populated with the content from
the last media slot on the previous sequence. Deselect this option if you
want new media displayed in the next sequence.
5. Continue selecting all the sequences in your video until all of the media slots
and sequences contain media.

Note: when adding media you can also click the button to
auto fill all the empty media slots in the sequences. Select Auto Fill by
Library Order to fill by the created date, as displayed in the Media Room
library. Select Auto Fill Using Videos First if you want to add the video
clips first.

Editing Media Clips

There are several editing options available for the media clips you want to use in
the Theme Designer.
Note: the editing options in the Theme Designer are limited to video
trimming, image duration, and adding effects. If you need to perform more
complex editing on your media clips, it is recommended that you do this
before importing the clips into the Theme Designer. See for Editing Your
Media for more advanced editing options.

79
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Trimming Video Clips

You can perform trims on the video clips used in the Theme Designer. To trim a
video clip, right-click on it in the Theme Designer and then select Trim. Or hover
your mouse over the video clip and click on in its thumbnail. See Performing a
Single Trim for detailed information on trimming video clips.

Muting Video Clips

Some theme templates and sequences contain background music that will be used
in your video. Because of this, you may want to mute the audio in the imported
video clips, so that it doesn't conflict with the background music.
To mute the audio in a video clip, hover your mouse over the video clip and then
click on in its thumbnail.

Modifying Image Duration

To modify the duration that an image clip is displayed in your outputted video, do
this:
1. Right-click on it in the Theme Designer and then select Set Duration. Or hover
your mouse over the image clip and then click on in its thumbnail.
2. In the Duration Settings window, enter in the how long you want it to display
in your video production. You can set the duration down to the number of
frames.
3. Click on OK.

Applying Zoom In on Media Clips

Some media slots in sequences allow you to zoom in on the media clip that was
added to it. If a zoom is available, then the icon is displayed in the top right
corner.

80
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

To apply a zoom in on the media clip, click on the icon. Click to remove it
if required.

Adding Video Effects to Clips

In the Theme Designer you can add special effects to your images and video clips.
Each special effect has unique attributes that you can customize to help achieve
the impression you want in your video production.
To add a video effect to a clip, do this:
1. Click on the Effects tab.
2. Select an effect and then drag and drop it on the clip.
3. If required, right-click on the clip and then select Modify Effect Settings. Use
the available sliders and options to customize the video effect to your
preference. Click on OK to save your changes.
See Adding Video Effects for more information on video effects.

Editing Background Music

You can customize the music that is used in your video. To edit the background
music, select one of the following options in the Background music drop-down:
Default (First Page): select this option to use the background music that is
included by default in theme templates.
Note: if you select sequences from more than one theme template, the
Theme Designer uses the background music that is applied to the first
sequence in the video.

Imported: select this option if you want to import your own custom
background music from your computer's hard drive. Select the music you
want to use and then click OK to set it as the music used.
No Music: select this option if you don't want to have any background music
in your video.

Background Music Preferences

You can trim the music used in your video or add fades. To do this, select

81
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Preferences in the Background music drop-down. Modify the music preferences as

follows:

if required, trim the background music using the player controls and the
mark-in/mark-out indicators.

if required, adjust the volume of the music using the available volume
control.

if required, use the slider to mix the audio level, by deciding whether to have
more background music or the original video's audio in the production.
Click OK to save your changes.

Editing Title Text

Some sequences contain title text that you can edit. If a sequence allows you to
edit title text, the text fields in Title settings will become active when the sequence
is selected.

To edit the title text, just enter the text you want to use in the fields provided. If you

82
 Po w erDirecto r Plug-ins

don't want any text displayed in the selected sequences, just make sure the text
field blank.

Replacing Background Images

Some sequences let you replace their background image. A thumbnail of the
background image is displayed in the Background area if the sequence has a
replaceable background image.

Click to replace the background with an image from your computer's hard drive.
Click if you want to remove the background image from the sequence.

Adding Transitions Between Sequences

When viewing a video created with the Theme Designer, you will notice that there
are transitions between the sequences in a theme template. These transitions are
editable in theme templates named "with transitions". Transitions can also be
added between sequences if you are using sequences from different theme
templates.
Note: in theme templates not named "with transitions", the transitions
between sequences are not editable. These theme templates use your
media to make the transitions between the sequences.

If adding a transition is available for a sequence, the Transition settings area

displays when the sequence is selected.

Click to add a transition before the selected sequence. Click if you want to
remove a selected transition from the sequence. See Using Transitions for more

83
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

information on transitions.

Previewing and Saving Movies

As you are creating your video in the Theme Designer, you can preview your
creation using the available preview controls.

Click to preview the entire movie, or to preview just the selected sequence.
Click to change the preview resolution, or to take a photo snapshot of your
movie.
The keyframe indicators on the preview timeline indicate where the media files in
the sequence are in the movie. Hover your mouse over a keyframe to view the clip
information.
Once you are done previewing your movie and you are satisfied with the results,
click on OK to close the Theme Designer, and import the created movie into the
timeline.

Editing Created Movies

Once you have created your content in the Theme Designer and imported it into
the timeline, you can edit it like any other video clip on the timeline. If you want to
edit or replace the media used in the created movie you can do this in the Theme
Designer.
To edit created content in the Theme Designer, do this:
1. Click on the created content in the timeline and then the Theme Designer
function button.
2. As required, edit the video in the Theme Designer.
3. When you are satisfied, click OK to save your changes and import the
updated created content into the timeline.

84
 Arranging M edia in Yo ur Pro ductio n

Chapter 7:

Arranging Media in Your

Production
Once you have your media in the media library, you can begin putting your video
production together by adding media clips to the editing workspace. You add the
media clips in the order that tells the story you want to tell.
Note: the timeline view of the CyberLink PowerDirector workspace offers
more editing freedom and ease of movement in your production. Be sure to
consult the Timeline View and Timeline Behavior sections to get the most
out of this view.

There are several program features you can utilize to assist with the arrangement of
media in your video production, including:
Magic Movie Wizard: auto creates a movie for you, using the media clips and
effects in your library. See Using the Magic Movie Wizard for more
information.
Slideshow Creator: auto creates a slideshow with your photos, in a few simple
steps. See Using the Slideshow Creator for more information.
Timeline markers*: add to the timeline ruler for more precise media clip
placement on the timeline. See Timeline Markers for more information.
Music Beat Detection*: use this feature to add music beat markers on the
music beat track, which you can use to arrange media clips to the music. See
Music Beat Detection for more information.
Sync by Audio: you can sync two or more clips that are on different timeline
tracks using the Sync by Audio feature. See Syncing Clips by Audio for more
information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

85
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Adding Video Clips and Images

to the Timeline
To start creating your video production, begin adding video clips and images to the
video tracks in the timeline.
If you are not sure which tracks you can add your media to, just select a clip in the
media library. The tracks in the timeline you can add the media to will "light up".
For more information on what media you can add to which track, see Timeline
Tracks.
Note: you may prefer to add video clips and images using the storyboard
view, since this view is simpler than the timeline view. However, you can
only add clips to the first track in this view. Therefore, this section uses the
timeline view in all of the procedures.
You can add video clips and images at any position on any video track in the
timeline. You no longer need to place your media on the top track or at the
beginning of the timeline. You now have total freedom to add the media exactly
where you want, and in the order you want it. Just start placing the media on a
timeline track, in a sequence that tells your story.
Note: if you want to add media to a precise position on the timeline,
consider using timeline markers. See Adding Timeline Markers for more
information.

If you insert or drop media onto other existing media clips that are on the timeline,
don't worry. CyberLink PowerDirector will prompt you to use its ripple editing
feature to overwrite, insert, replace, split, trim, transition, or speed up media to help
you easily place the media where you want it.
Once you add a video clip or image to any timeline track, click the Modify button
above the timeline to edit its properties in the PiP Designer. See Modifying Media in
the PiP Designer for more information.
Note: you can add additional tracks to your project's timeline in the Track
Manager, allowing you to have up to 99 PiP objects displayed on a video at
the same time. See Track Manager for more information.

86
 Arranging M edia in Yo ur Pro ductio n

Adding Video Clips and Images

You can add video clips and images onto any video track in the timeline, and at
any position.
Note: when you add video clips to the timeline, CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically adds its audio track (if available) to the linked audio track.

To insert video clips or images into the workspace, do one of the following:
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the media, select
the media in the library, and then click to add it to the
selected video track.
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the media, right-
click on the media in the library, and then select Insert on Selected Track to
add it to the selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a media clip to a desired position on a video
track to add it to the timeline.
When adding a clip to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if the
timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you are
prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the newly added clip.
Insert: select to split the clip and insert the new clip between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same
track to the right.
Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the new clip
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
Crossfade: select to lay the clip over a portion of the existing clip and auto
add a transition between the two clips. CyberLink PowerDirector uses the fade
transition on the video track, and the constant gain audio transition if both
clips have audio on the corresponding audio track.

87
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
Replace: select to replace the current clip on the timeline with the new clip.
Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the current
content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is shorter than the newly
added video clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically trims the video
clip to fit the original clip's duration. For images, CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically resizes them to fit the original clip's duration.
When inserting a video file, if the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a
timeline track, you are prompted to use one of these ripple editing options to insert
the clip:
Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto trim off the end of
the video clip to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Note: this feature is also available when inserting image clips into a
timeline gap that have durations longer than the gap.

Speed up to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto speed up the

video clip so that it fits the gap to the right of the timeline slider.

Adding Color Boards and Backgrounds

The use of color boards allows you to insert solid frames of color into your video.
Color boards are really useful as quick transitions between video clips or as
background for titles and ending credits. Backgrounds provide interesting and
creative environments for PiP objects, titles, and more.
Note: you can create your own custom color boards in the Media Room.
See Creating New Color Boards for more information.

You can find color boards and backgrounds in your media library, by clicking to
open the explorer view, or selecting Color Boards or Backgrounds from the Media
Content drop-down.

88
 Arranging M edia in Yo ur Pro ductio n

To insert color boards or backgrounds into the workspace, do one of the following:

use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the color boards or
backgrounds, select it in the library, and then click to add it
to the selected video track.
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the color boards or
backgrounds, right-click on it in the library, and then select Insert on Selected
Track to add it to the selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a color board or background to a desired
position on a video track to add it to the timeline.
When adding a color board or background to the timeline (inserting or dragging
and dropping), if the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an
existing clip, you are prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the
clip:
Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the color board/
background.
Insert: select to split the clip and insert the color board/background between
the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the
same track to the right.
Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the color board/
background between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves
all of the media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip,
right.
Crossfade: select to lay the color board/background over a portion of the
existing clip and auto add a fade transition between the two clips.

89
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
Replace: select to replace the current clip on the timeline with the color
board/background. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure
of the current content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the newly added clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically resizes it to fit
the original clip's duration.

If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when
inserting a color board or background, you are prompted to use this ripple editing
option to insert the clip:
Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the color board/background to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.

Creating New Color Boards

CyberLink PowerDirector lets you create custom color boards using the color
selector, or by selecting an area in the media file preview window.

Creating a Color Board Using the Color Selector

To create a color board using the color selector, do this:

1. Click on the button.

2. Select From Color Selector.
3. In the color palette, do any of the following:
Select one of the basic colors.
Use the color picker to choose a color, and the leveler on the right to adjust
the shade.
Type in the desired HSL or RGB values.
4. Click OK to close the color palette and add the new color board to the media

90
 Arranging M edia in Yo ur Pro ductio n

library.

Creating a Color Board from a Media File

To create a color board by selecting a pixel in the preview window, do this:
1. Add the media clip to the timeline that you want to use to create the color
board.
2. If required, use the playback controls to find the frame of video that contains
the color you want to use to create the color board.
3. Make sure the media file is selected in the timeline, i.e. that a preview of the
media file is displayed in the preview window.

4. Click on the button.

5. Select From Preview.
6. In the Select Color from Preview window, use the eye dropper to select the
pixel in the video preview image that you want to use to create a color board.
7. Click OK to close the window and add the new color board to the media
library.

Adding Audio Clips

Audio clips allow you to add background music or a narrative voice-over to your
video production. You can add audio clips to the audio portion of a video track, to
the voice track, or to the music track.
Note: you can add transitions between two audio clips on any of the
available audio tracks. To do this, go to the Transitions Room and then
select Audio from the transition library filter drop-down. See Using
Transitions for more information on adding transitions between two clips.
If you are not sure which tracks you can add audio to, just select a clip in the media
library. The tracks in the timeline you can add the audio to will "light up". For more
information on what media you can add to which track, see Timeline Tracks.
Note: you can add additional audio tracks to your project's timeline in the
Track Manager. See Track Manager for more information.

To insert audio into the workspace, do one of the following:

91
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: if you want to add audio to a precise position on the timeline,

consider using timeline markers. See Adding Timeline Markers for more
information.

use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the audio, select the
audio file in the library, and then click:

to add it to the audio portion of the selected video

track.

to add it to the voice track.

to add it to the music track. The music track is always

the bottom track in the timeline.

use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the audio, right-
click on the audio file in the library, and then select:
Add to Voice Track to add it to the voice track.
Add to Music Track to add it to the music track. The music track is always
the bottom track in the timeline.
You can also manually drag and drop an audio clip to a desired position on any of
the audio tracks available it the timeline.
When adding audio to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if the
timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you are
prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the newly added audio
clip.
Insert: select to split the clip and insert the new audio clip between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same
track to the right.
Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the new audio clip
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
Crossfade: select to lay the audio over a portion of the existing clip and auto
add a constant gain transition between the two clips.

92
 Arranging M edia in Yo ur Pro ductio n

Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding a transition between the two clips. The Crossfade option is
only available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on
the track.
Replace: select to replace the current audio clip on the timeline with the new
audio clip. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the
current content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the audio clip you are replacing is shorter than the
newly added audio clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically trims it to fit
the original clip's duration.

If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on an audio timeline track when
inserting audio, you are prompted to use one of these ripple editing options to
insert the clip:
Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto trim off the end of
the audio clip to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Speed up to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto speed up the
audio clip so that it fits the gap to the right of the timeline slider.

Magic Music
Magic Music* is designed to help you add music into your video production. In just
a few simple steps, Magic Music can turn your video production into a professional
looking movie through the addition of background music.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Click the button located to the left of the timeline and then select Magic
Music to open the Magic Music panel. Magic Music uses SmartSound to add music
to your video production. Just follow the four steps on the user interface to select
the music style (genre), song, and then duration, before applying your selection to
your video production.
Note: SmartSound provides some music for you to use in your video
production, but you can also purchase music. Click the SmartSound
button to view SmartSound related copyright and purchasing information.

93
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Syncing Audio
When you add independent audio to any of the audio tracks on the timeline, it is
important to ensure that it syncs with the video in your production. CyberLink
PowerDirector displays the audio waveform on each clip that is added to the
timeline. The waveform is useful when trimming or splitting the audio clip, and
also when trying to sync audio to the video in your production.
Note: if you are trying to sync audio in an audio clip with the audio is a
video clip (because they have the same source audio), you can use Sync
by Audio to sync the clips.

You can even zoom in on the timeline for more precise syncing, as the waveform is
viewable down to the 1/10 frame level.
Note: if an audio clip's waveform is not displayed, it may be because this
option was disable in preferences. You can enable it again by selecting
Show sound waveform in timeline in General Preferences.

Once zoomed in, you can use the waveform in conjunction with Timeline Markers
to sync media more precisely in your video production.

Music Beat Detection

Use the Music Beat Detection* feature in CyberLink PowerDirector to analyze a

94
 Arranging M edia in Yo ur Pro ductio n

music clip in your video production, and then add beat markers to the music beat
track to help you sync the audio in your production. You can also manually add
music beat markers.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

You can then use these music beat markers for more precise arrangement and
syncing of media with the added music.
To add music beat markers, do this:
1. Add a music clip to an audio track on the timeline (audio, voice, or music
track).
2. Right-click on the music clip and then select Use Automatic Music Beat
Detection. The Automatic Music Beat Detection window opens.
3. Use the slider to set the Minimum time between beat markers. For example, if
you know the beats in the music are once a second, you can set the slider to
apply markers ever 2.0 seconds if you want to place media on every other
beat.
4. Click Detect. CyberLink PowerDirector will analyze the music clip, and then
detect and apply the music beat markers to the music beat track.
5. Click on Apply to close the Music Beat Detection window.
Once the music beats markers are added, media will snap to them when added to a
track on the timeline.

To remove the music beat markers, do one of the following:

remove the music clip from the timeline.
right-click on a music beat marker on the music beat track, and then select

95
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Remove Selected Music Beat Marker.

right-click on the music beat track, and then select Remove All Music Beat
Markers.

Manually Adding Music Beat Markers

To manually add music beat markers to the timeline, do this:
1. Add a music clip to an audio track on the timeline (audio, voice, or music
track).
2. Right-click on the music clip and then select Use Automatic Music Beat
Detection. The Use Automatic Music Beat Detection window opens.
3. If required, use the magnification tools to zoom in on the audio waveform for
the selected music clip.
4. Manually drag the timeline slider to the position on the audio waveform
where you want to add the music beat marker.
5. Click Add (or the press the A key on your keyboard) to add a music beat
marker at the current position.
6. Repeat the above steps to add as many music beat markers as you want.
7. Click on Apply to close the Music Beat Detection window.
Note: you can also use the player controls to play the music, and then
continually click the Add button (or press the A key on your keyboard) to
add the music beat markers when you hear a beat.

Syncing Clips by Audio

If you have two or more clips that have the same source audio, you can use Sync
by Audio to align the starting positions of the clips on the timeline so that they are
all in sync.
Note: you can sync both video and audio clips using this feature.

To sync two or more clips by audio*, do this:

96
 Arranging M edia in Yo ur Pro ductio n

Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version

table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

1. Select all of the clips on the timeline that you want to sync.
2. Click the Sync by Audio function button that displays after selecting the clips.
3. CyberLink PowerDirector analyzes all the selected clips and then realigns them
so that their audio is in sync.

Using the Magic Movie Wizard

If you are new to the editing process and not sure how or where to get started, then
the Magic Movie Wizard can help. The Magic Movie Wizard takes all of your media
and creates a completed video production in just a few steps. You can then edit the
created production, output it to a file, or burn it to a disc.
Note: if you want more creative control than the Magic Movie Wizard
provides, you can also use the Theme Designer to create your video
production. The Theme Designer allows you to customize the theme
templates used and choose the exact images, video clips, and background
music you want in your production. See Using the Theme Designer for more
information.
To use the Magic Movie Wizard, do this:

1. Click the button above the timeline and then select Magic Movie
Wizard.
2. Select which media you want to use in your movie, as follows:
Media Library: the Magic Movie Wizard uses all of the media in the library to
create your movie.
Timeline: the Magic Movie Wizard only uses the media that is currently on the
timeline.
Note: any edits you previously made in your project to the clips in the
timeline are ignored. The Magic Movie Wizard uses the source clips to
create you final movie.

Select items: the Magic Movie Wizard only uses the media that is currently
selected in the library.
3. Click Next to continue.

97
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

4. See the step by step description in Easy Editor for more information on the
remaining steps in the Magic Movie Wizard.

Using the Slideshow Creator

The Slideshow Creator is the easiest way to instantly turn your photos into a
dynamic slideshow.
To create a slideshow using the Slideshow Creator, do this:
1. Drag all the photos that you want in the slideshow into the timeline.
2. Make sure the photos are selected, and then click on the Slideshow button to
launch the Slideshow Creator.
3. See the step by step description in Slideshow Creator for more information on
the remaining steps required to create your slideshow.
Note: after the Slideshow Creator has created your slideshow and inserted
it into the timeline, if you would like to view each individual slide/photo in the
slideshow for advanced editing, just right-click on the file in the timeline
and then select Show Individual Photos.

98
 Editing Yo ur M edia

Chapter 8:

Editing Your Media

Once you have your video clips, audio files, and images in the editing workspace/
timeline you can start editing them. Editing is a broad term that encompasses a
number of different functions, including splitting, trimming, applying fixes, and
much more.
This section describes all of the editing processes you can perform on your media
clips.

Content Aware Editing

Use Content Aware Editing* on your video clips to automatically generate the best
outputted video content for your production.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.

Content Aware Editing analyzes your video clips to find the portions that it believes
are the best and most interesting moments, and also the portions that need fixing.
You can then simply click on the "good parts" to include them in the video
production, and choose to fix or trim away the "bad parts".
Note: during the analysis process, CyberLink PowerDirector also detects
all the scenes in the video clips and marks them on the Content Aware
Editing window timeline with .
To analyze the video clips and then open the Content Aware Editing window, right-
click on a video clip in the media library or the timeline, and then select Content
Aware Editing.
If you would like to perform a batch analysis on multiple video clips at once, do
this:

1. In the Media Room, click on to access the library menu and then select
Content Aware Details.
2. Select all the video clips in the Analyze column and then click the Analyze
button.

99
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

3. Once the analysis is complete, click the button next to the video clip
that you want to edit in the Content Aware Editing window.
Note: the Content Aware Details view displays the analysis results for all
the video clips analyzed and edited in Content Aware Editing. See Content
Aware Details for more information.

Using Content Aware Editing

When editing video clips in Content Aware Editing, its window displays as follows:

A - Pla yer Controls, B - Segm ent Selection Tools, C - Selected Segm ents, D - Deselected Segm ents, E -
Detected Scene M a rkers, F - Recom m ended Segm ents, G - Segm ents Need Fixing, H - Fix All
Segm ents, I - Content Selection Ca tegories
Note: the preview quality of the video in the Content Aware Editing window is
dependent on preview quality setting specified in preview/display options.
See Preview Quality for more information on selecting a preview quality.

100
 Editing Yo ur M edia

In the Content Aware Editing window, the segments indicated in green are the
recommended portions of the clip that CyberLink PowerDirector believes are the
most interesting, or are the "good parts". They may include camera zooms or pans,
and segments that contain a lot of motion or people talking (speech). CyberLink
PowerDirector also performs face detection on the video clip to highlight sections
that include people's faces.
The light brown segments are parts that need fixing, because either the video is
shaky or poorly lit. You can choose to fix or remove these "bad parts".
Check the content selection categories for details of what each highlighted
segment consists of.
Note: hover your mouse over the highlighted segments for more detailed
information about what they include.

The segments that are not highlighted are parts of your video that CyberLink
PowerDirector believes are not necessary to include. You can however include
these segments by selecting them with the mark in and out buttons.

Previewing the Video Content

Use the player controls to preview the entire video clip. To preview a specific
highlighted segment, right-click on it and then select Preview this Segment.
Playback stops once the selected segment playback is complete.

Fixing Content
If the segments that CyberLink PowerDirector has highlighted for removal contain
parts of your video that you don't want to exclude, you can instantly fix them in the
Content Aware Editing window.
To fix segments, do either of the following:
right-click on the highlighted segment and then select Apply Fix to Entire
Scene. Select this option to apply the required fix to the entire scene in the
video clip, which is indicated by the detected scene markers. This ensures
there are no sudden changes in lighting or other video properties in the
scene. In the Auto Fixer window use the player controls to preview how the
fixed content will look. If satisfied with the results, ensure that Apply auto fix is
selected and then click on OK to apply the fix to the scene.

101
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: if no scenes were detected in your video clip, the fix is applied to the
entire clip when Apply Fix to Entire Scene is selected.

right-click on the highlighted segment and then select Apply Fix to this
Segment. Select this option to apply the required fix to just the selected
segment of video. In the Auto Fixer window use the player controls to preview
how the fixed content will look. If satisfied with the results, ensure that Apply
auto fix is selected and then click on OK to apply the fix to the selected
segment of the video clip only.

click the button to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto fix each of the
highlighted segments in the same content selection category.
CyberLink PowerDirector will fix the segments, which are then indicated with a
wrench icon.

Note: if you'd like to undo any of the fixes you made in the Content Aware
Editing window, just right-click on a fixed segment and then select Remove
Applied Fix.

Content Selection
Use the segment selection tools to begin selecting the video content you want to
include in the trimmed clip. Any content segments you add to the deselected list,
or do not select, will be trimmed out of the video clip.
Note: you must add at least one segment to the Selected list to enable the
OK button and trim the video clip.

Selecting Content
To select video content, do any of the following:
click on a highlighted segment and then click the Selected button.
right-click on a segment and then select Add to Selected List.

click on to add all of the video content, except the content in the
Deselected list, to the Selected list. CyberLink PowerDirector will remove any

102
 Editing Yo ur M edia

content you previously added to the Selected list.

use the player controls to find and then click on to mark the beginning
of a segment of video you want to include. Use the player controls or drag the
timeline slider and then click to mark the end. Once selected, click on
Selected to add to the Selected list.

Once you are done selecting all the content, click the button in the Selected list
to preview what the trimmed video clip will look like. Select a segment and then
click if you want to remove it from the list.
Click on OK to trim the video clip as specified. The trimmed video is automatically
inserted into the timeline at the current timeline slider position.

Deselecting Content
To deselect video content, do any of the following:
click on a highlighted segment and then click the Deselected button.
right-click on a segment and then select Add to Deselected List.

use the player controls to find and then click on to mark the beginning
of a segment of video you do not want to include. Use the player controls or
drag the timeline slider and then click to mark the end. Once selected,
click on Deselected to add to the Deselected list.

103
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Once you are done deselecting all the content, click the button in the
Deselected list to preview the content that will be trimmed out. Select a segment
and then click if you want to remove it from the list.
Click on OK to trim the video clip as specified. The trimmed video is placed in the
timeline for you automatically.

Splitting a Clip
You can quickly split a media clip that is on any track in the timeline into two
separate clips. To do this, move the timeline slider (or use the player controls) to the
position in the clip where you want to split it. Next, click the Split button to
separate it into two clips that you can then move around separately from one
another.

104
 Editing Yo ur M edia

You can also use it to quickly remove unwanted portions of a media clip, or if you
want to insert other media between the two portions.

Unlinking Video/Audio Clips

When you add a video clip with audio to the timeline, its audio portion is visible on
its corresponding audio track. You can unlink the two portions of the clip, allowing
you to modify them separately, remove one completely from the timeline, or use it
elsewhere in your project.
To unlink the audio from a video clip, right-click on it in the timeline and then
select Unlink Video and Audio. To link the two files back together, select them
both, right-click on them, and then select Link Video and Audio.

Trimming Video and Audio Clips

Use the trim functions to remove unwanted portions from your video and audio
clips. You can use the Single Trim function to trim off the beginning and/or ends
of a video clip, or the Multi Trim function to remove multiple portions at once. The
Trim Audio function lets you trim audio visually, using its waveform.

105
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: when you trim media clips, the program does not delete any of the
original source media's content. It just marks the requested edits on the
clips and then applies the edits when it renders the final video during
production.

Trimming a Video Clip

To trim a video clip, select it in the timeline and then click the Trim function
button.

Performing a Single Trim

Use the video trim function to quickly trim off unwanted portions at the beginning
and end of a video clip on the timeline.

A - Preview Area , B - M a rked Positions in Clip, C - M a rk Out Position Slider, D - Selected Content, E -
M a rk In Position Slider, F - Pla yer Controls

106
 Editing Yo ur M edia

To trim a video clip, do this.

1. Select the video clip on the timeline you want to trim, and then click on the
Trim button above the timeline.
2. If required, click on the Single Trim tab.
3. Use the player controls to find where you want the trimmed clip to begin, and
then click to set the mark in position or drag the mark in position slider
to this position.

4. Use the player controls to find where you want the trimmed clip to end, and
then click to set the mark out position or drag the mark out position
slider to this position.

5. If required, you can preview what the trimmed clip will look like by clicking
Output and then clicking the play button on the player controls. Click
Original if you want to play the original video.
6. Click OK to set your changes and trim the clip.
Note: you can reenter the trim window to refine the trimmed clip at any time.
You can also drag the trimmed edges of a video clip on the timeline as well.

Performing a Multi Trim

The multi trim function lets you trim out one or more segments of a video clip at
once, resulting in a series of clips that are independent from the original video.

107
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

A - Preview Area , B - Tim eline, C - Tim eline M a gnifier* , D - M a gnified Tim eline, E - Selected Segm ents,
F - M a gnifier Controls* , G - Trim m ing Tools, H -Pla yer Controls, I - Fra m e Displa y
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To perform a multi trim on a video clip, do this.

1. Select the video clip on the timeline you want to trim, and then click on the
Trim button above the timeline.
2. Click on the Multi Trim tab.

3. If required, use and to change the magnification level on the video

clip. You can magnify the timeline down to each individual frame for a more
precise edit. The size of the timeline magnifier changes based on the
magnification level set.
4. Use the player controls to find the beginning of the first trimmed segments,

108
 Editing Yo ur M edia

or the mark in position.

5. Click to set the mark in position.

6. Use the player controls or drag the timeline slider to position where you want
the first segment to end, and then click to set the mark out position. The
trimmed segment is added to Selected Segments section.
7. Repeat the above steps to trim out all the required segments.
8. If required, you can preview what the trimmed clip will look like by clicking
Output and then clicking the play button on the player controls. Click
Original if you want to play the original video.
9. Click OK to set your changes and trim the clip.
Note: the segments of video that CyberLink PowerDirector inserts into the
timeline are indicated in blue. If you want to remove these segments from
the trimmed video clip, click the button to invert the trimming results.

Extra Trimming Tools

On the Multi Trim tab, you can also use the following extra trimming tools to:
you can manually drag the mark in and out sliders on the timeline or
magnified timeline to edit the current positions if required.

detect all the scenes in the selected video clip by clicking on . Once
selected, choose whether you want the program to add all the scenes to the
trimmed segments area, or just mark the scene breaks for you on the
timeline.

Trimming an Audio Clip

Use the audio trim function to quickly trim off unwanted portions at the beginning
and end of an audio clip on the timeline.

109
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

A - Audio Wa veform , B - Tim eline Slider, C - M a rked Positions in Clip, D - Zoom Controls, E - M a rk In/
Out Buttons, F - Pla yer Controls
To trim an audio clip, do this.
1. Select the audio clip on the timeline you want to trim, and then click on the
Trim button above the timeline.

2. If required, use and to zoom in and out on the audio waveform for a
more precise edit.
3. Use the player controls to find where you want the trimmed clip to begin, or
the mark in position.

4. Click to set the mark in position.

110
 Editing Yo ur M edia

5. Use the player controls or drag the timeline slider to position where you want
to audio clip to end, and then click to set the mark out position.
6. Click OK to set your changes and trim the clip.
Note: you can reenter the trim window to refine the trimmed clip at any time.
You can also drag the trimmed edges of the audio clip on the timeline as
well.

Setting a Media Clip's Duration

When you add images, color boards, and backgrounds to a timeline track, you set
how long they are displayed in your video production. Unlike video and audio clips
which have a maximum length, these media clips can have any duration you want.
Note: to set the duration of a video or audio clip, see Trimming Video and
Audio Clips.

To set a media clip's duration, do this:

Note: you can also set the duration of effects, such as PiP objects, particle
effects, and title effects, using this same method.

1. Select the clip in the timeline.

2. Click the Duration button (or right-click on the clip, select Set Clip Attributes,
and then select Set Duration).
3. In the Duration Settings window, enter in the how long you want it to display
in your video production. You can set the duration down to the number of
frames.
4. Click on OK.
You can also change the duration of a media clip (including video and audio clips)
by selecting it and then dragging the end of the clip to the desired length.
Note: you can only lengthen a video or audio clip back to its original
duration.

111
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Setting TV (Video Clip

Interlacing) Format
All video clips have an interlacing (TV) format, which specifies how frames are
displayed. Using video clips with conflicting (or incorrect) TV formats can result in
degraded video quality in your final production.
Before you produce your video, it is recommended that you set all of the video
clips to the same format. While CyberLink PowerDirector can normally detect and
suggest the correct format, some interlaced video (such as a video with very little
motion) may be misjudged as a progressive video.
CyberLink PowerDirector automatically produces interlaced video for DVD, SVCD
and DV-AVI. Only change this setting if you are sure that CyberLink PowerDirector
has wrongly set the format.
Note: this is an extremely important step to take before production, as it
can drastically affect final video quality. It is recommended that you check
the user guide for your video camcorder to determine what format your video
should be.
To set a video clip's TV format, do this:
1. Right-click on a video clip in the timeline, select Set Clip Attributes, and then
Set TV format.
2. In the Interlace/Progressive Settings window, do one of the following:
click the Scan and Suggest Format button to have CyberLink PowerDirector
auto detect and set the format for you.
manually select one of the three available formats. See the description on the
right of the window for a detailed description of each format.
3. Click OK to set your changes.

Adjusting Video Clip Aspect

Ratio
Some of the video clips in the timeline may not have the same aspect ratio as your
video production. You can adjust the aspect ratio for these clips, so that all the
media in your video production has the same aspect ratio.

112
 Editing Yo ur M edia

To adjust a video clip's aspect ratio, do this:

1. Right-click on a video clip in the timeline, select Set Clip Attributes, and then
Set Aspect Ratio.
2. In the Clip Aspect Ratio Settings window, do one of the following:
if you want your project to use the original aspect ratio of the selected video
clip, select Detect aspect ratio automatically. If the clip's aspect ratio is
different from the project's, then CyberLink PowerDirector will letterbox the
video clip to fill in the rest of the frame.
if the aspect ratio of the selected clip is 4:3, then select The aspect ratio of the
video is 4:3 option. If the project ratio is 16:9, select the stretch method to
convert the 4:3 clip to 16:9.
if the aspect ratio of the selected clip is 16:9, then select The aspect ratio of the
video is 16:9 option. If the project ratio is 4:3, select the stretch method to
convert the 16:9 clip to 4:3.
if the selected clip has an aspect ratio other than 4:3 or 16:9, then select the
Neither 4:3 nor 16:9 option. Next, select the stretch method to convert the
video clip's aspect ratio to the project's aspect ratio.
if you are not sure what the aspect ratio of the original video clip is, click the
Detect and Suggest button. CyberLink PowerDirector will select one of the
above options for you.
Note: for best results when changing a clip's aspect ratio, select the CLPV
option. CLPV (CyberLink Pano Vision) is video stretching technology from
CyberLink that produces minimal distortion in the center of the picture.
3. Select the Apply to all video clips option if you want to apply the current
setting to all the video clips on the same track.
4. Click OK to set your changes.

Stretching Images
Some of the images/photos in the timeline may not have the same aspect ratio as
your video production. You can stretch these images, so that all the media in your
video production has the same aspect ratio.
To stretch an image, do this:
1. Right-click on an image in the timeline, select Set Clip Attributes, and then

113
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

select Set Image Stretch Mode.

2. In the drop-down in the Image Stretch Mode Settings window, select one of
the following:
Stretch clip to 4:3/16:9 aspect ratio: select this option if you want CyberLink
PowerDirector to stretch the sides of the select image to fit your project's
aspect ratio.
Use CLPV to stretch clip to 4:3/16:9 aspect ratio: select this option to use CLPV
to stretch the image. CLPV (CyberLink Pano Vision) is an image stretching
technology from CyberLink that produces minimal distortion in the center of
the image.
3. Select the Apply to all image clips option if you want to apply the
current setting to all the image clips on the same track.
4. Click OK to set your changes.

Cropping Images
You can completely customize the aspect ratio of the images in your video
production or crop out unwanted portions of a photo, using the crop image
function.
To crop an image, do this:
1. Select the image in the timeline and then click the Crop Image button. You
can also right-click on the image and then select Crop Image.
2. Set the size of the crop area by selecting one of the following:
4:3: gives the crop area, and the resulting cropped image, a 4:3 aspect ratio.
16:9: gives the crop area, and the resulting cropped image, a 16:9 aspect ratio.
Freeform: select if you want to manually resize the crop area on the image
and give the resulting cropped image a custom aspect ratio.
Custom: select if you want to set a custom aspect ratio for the cropped image
using the Width and Height fields.
3. Use the Crop size controls to set the size of the crop area, and the resulting
cropped image. You can also manually drag the edges of the crop area on the
image to resize it as required.
4. C lick OK to set your changes and crop the image.

114
 Editing Yo ur M edia

Changing the Shape of Media

CyberLink PowerDirector lets you change the shape of the media in your video
production. Videos, images, and PiP objects added to the timeline have freeform
properties, so you can easily change their shape to create media that is different
from the usual rectangle or square shape.

CyberLink PowerDirector lets you change the X and Y positions for the four corners
and the center of a media clip, giving it a custom freeform shape.
Note: the top-left corner of the video frame is the 0 axis, with the bottom-
right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0. The center position in the video
frame is 0.500, 0.500.

To change the shape of a media clip, do this:

1. Select a media clip on the timeline, and then ensure that you are in the Clip
preview mode so that the media crosshairs are displayed.
2. Use your mouse to click and drag the blue nodes in the corners of the media
clip, changing it to the desired freeform shape.

115
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: you can also change the shape of media clips by altering their
freeform positions using keyframes. See Utilizing Keyframes on Media for
more information.

Fixing and Enhancing

Images/Videos
Select the media files on the timeline and then click the Fix/Enhance button to
apply instant fixes, such as lighting adjustments, video/audio denoise, video
stabilization (including the new enhanced stabilizer), and fix rotational camera
shake*.

Note: * click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information
on using the available fix and enhance tools.

You can also enhance the media by adjusting color, white balance, or applying
TrueTheater HD* technology from CyberLink on videos. The Fix/Enhance feature
also lets you adjust the 3D orientation* of 3D media to fix its 3D effect when
needed.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.

To begin fixing and enhancing your media, select it in the timeline and then click
the Fix/Enhance button.

116
 Editing Yo ur M edia

You can apply fixes and video enhancements to the entire duration of a media clip,
or customize how they are displayed using keyframes. See Utilizing Keyframes on
Media for more information on customizing the way the fixes and enhancements
are displayed in your video production.

Applying ColorDirector Color Effects

(Presets)
In the Fix/Enhance panel you can apply CyberLink ColorDirector presets on your
video clips, instantly transforming the color and look of the clips.
Note: ColorDirector presets can be downloaded from DirectorZone and
imported into the Fix/Enhance panel by clicking and then selecting the
downloaded preset file on your hard drive.
To apply a ColorDirector color effect, do this:
1. Select the video clip in the timeline and then click the Fix/Enhance button.
2. Select the Color Effect check box.
3. Select one of the available color effects to apply it to the selected clip.

Advanced Fixes and Enhancements

If you have CyberLink PhotoDirector* and/or ColorDirector* installed on your
computer, you can access the advanced fixes and enhancements available in these
programs from within CyberLink PowerDirector. The adjustments you make to your
media clips are then imported back into your current video production.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.

CyberLink PhotoDirector is a photography program that lets you manage and

adjust your digital photos. CyberLink ColorDirector is a video editing program that
turns your video footage into eye-catching movies through the use of video color
creating and correcting.

To adjust an image in CyberLink PhotoDirector, do this:

1. Select the image clip on the timeline, click the Fix / Enhance button above the
timeline, and then the PhotoDirector button. The CyberLink PhotoDirector
program opens.

117
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

2. Perform the adjustments on the image as necessary. Please consult the help
file in CyberLink PhotoDirector for detailed information on adjusting and
editing images in that program.
3. Once you finish adjusting the image file in CyberLink PhotoDirector, click the
Back button within the program. Your changes are saved and the adjusted
image is imported back into the timeline.
To adjust a video clip in CyberLink ColorDirector, do this:
1. Select the video clip on the timeline, click the Fix / Enhance button above the
timeline, and then the ColorDirector button. The CyberLink ColorDirector
program opens.
2. Perform the adjustments on the video clip as necessary. Please consult the
help file in CyberLink ColorDirector for detailed information on adjusting
video clips in that program.
3. Once you finish editing the video clip in CyberLink ColorDirector, click the
Back button within the program. Your changes are saved and the adjusted
video clip is imported back into the timeline.

Power Tools
Select a media clip on the timeline and then select the Power Tools button to
perform a range of powerful functions, including:
2D to 3D*: select this option to convert any 2D images or videos into 3D,
using TrueTheater 3D. Use the Scene Depth slider to adjust the amount of
depth in the resulting 3D image.
Video/Audio in Reverse*: when enabled on a selected video or audio clip, it
plays backwards.
Video Crop: select this option to crop or zoom in on a specific portion of a
video clip. Select the Crop Video button to define the area you want to zoom
in on (crop). You can then customize the motion on the cropped portion of
video. See Magic Motion Designer for information on customizing the motion
on the cropped section of video.
Video/Audio Speed: select this option to change the speed of a video or audio
clip. For an advanced slow motion effect, use the Slow motion video with
frame interpolated technology* option. Select Stretch audio (between 2X and
0.5X only) to stretch the audio to match the new video's length. Deselect this

118
 Editing Yo ur M edia

option to mute the audio. You can also enter a new duration in New video
length video to manually increase/reduce a video clip's speed.
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then click
and drag the edge of a video or audio clip on the timeline to manually
change its speed to fit your required duration.

Video/Photo Rotation: select this option and then use the buttons to rotate a
video or image up to 360 degrees in either direction. You can also enter in a
custom rotation amount in the field provided, and press the Enter key on your
keyboard to apply it.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Utilizing Keyframes on Media

Use keyframes in your video production to define the start and end points of an
applied fix, enhancement, or effect on images, videos, and audio. You can also use
keyframes to change the volume level of your video and audio clips at specific
moments.
To use keyframes on your media, select the clip on the timeline and then click the
Keyframe* button to open the Keyframe Settings panel. See the available Keyframe
Settings below, and Adding Keyframes for information on applying these settings
at different moments in your video production.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

In the Keyframe Settings panel, the following options are available, depending on
the type of media selected:
Note: once you have customized the fixes, enhancements, and effects on a
clip using keyframes, you can right click on the clip and select Copy
Keyframe Attributes. This allows you to paste all of its keyframe
attributes onto another clip in the timeline, applying the same changes to
the clip. To apply just some of the keyframe attributes modified in this
panel, just right click on Fix/Enhance, Effect, Clip Attributes, or Volume
to copy and paste the changes to another clip.
Fix/Enhance

Use the available sliders to fix and enhance images, videos, and audio clips at the

119
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

current keyframe in your video production.

Lighting Adjustment: adjust the lighting in video clips using the Degree slider.
Select Extreme backlight if you need to adjust the back lighting in the clip.
Video Denoise: use the Degree slider to increase or decrease the amount of
video noise in video clips.
Audio Denoise: for video and audio clips, use the Audio Denoise feature to
remove unwanted noise from clips. Select the type of noise from the drop-
down you are removing, and then use the Degree slider to set the intensity of
denoise on the clip.
Video Enhancement: use the Degree slider to set the amount of TrueTheater
HD video enhancement applied to video clips.
Color Adjustment: use the available sliders to adjust the exposure, brightness,
contrast, hue, saturation, sharpness, and more on images and videos.
White Balance: use the Color temperature and Tint sliders to manually adjust
the white balance in images and videos, or select White calibration and then
click to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto calibrate for you.
Effect
When you apply video effects to media clips on the timeline, you can use
keyframes to adjust the intensity of the effect at different moments of the clip. See
Adding Video Effects for information on adding effects to your media.
Note: the settings and sliders that are available in the Keyframe Settings
panel are completely dependent on the type of effect you are editing.

Clip Attributes
In the Clip Attributes section you can adjust the opacity, size, freeform shape, and
more for media clips in your video production.
Opacity: use the slider to adjust the opacity of images and video clips at
different moments (keyframes) in your video production.
H scale: set the height of media clips in at different moments (keyframes) in
your video production.
W scale: set the width of media clips in at different moments (keyframes) in
your video production.

120
 Editing Yo ur M edia

Rotation: enter in the preferred orientation in degrees for media clips at

different moments (keyframes) in your video production.
Motion: in the fields provided, enter the X and Y position of the center of the
selected media clip at different moments (keyframes) in your video
production. Changing these values for different keyframes will create motion
in the clip.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
media as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the video frame is 0.500, 0.500.

Freeform position: in the eight freeform position fields provided, define the
shape of the selected media clip by setting the X and Y positions for its four
corners in the video frame. By entering different values at different moments
(keyframes) in your video production, the clip's freeform shape can change
over time in your video production. See Changing the Shape of Media for
more information on freeform media clips.
Enable 3D depth on the PiP media: if you are creating a 3D video production,
select this option to give the PiP media a 3D* effect. Once enabled, use the
slider to set the amount of depth you want the PiP media to have in 3D.
Dragging the slider left will make the 3D PiP object seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear
farther away (in the background).
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Volume
For video and audio clips in your video production, use the available slider to adjust
the level of the selected clip's volume at different moments in your production.

Adding Keyframes
In the Keyframe Settings window, there is a mini timeline for the selected media
clip. The timeline matches the duration of the selected media clip.

121
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

You can resize the timeline ruler and move the timeline slider, just like on the main
timeline.
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
Note: once you have customized the fixes, enhancements, and effects on a
clip using keyframes, you can right click on the clip and select Copy
Keyframe Attributes. This allows you to paste these keyframe attributes
on another clip in the timeline, applying the same changes to the clip.
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your media clip where you
want its properties to change.
2. In the panel on the left, use the slider or other options to change the clips
properties as required. Note that a keyframe marker is added at that moment
in timeline.

122
 Editing Yo ur M edia

3. Use the player controls to find the next moment you want to add the next
keyframe, and then modify the clip properties as required again.

4. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes. In the above example, the brightness of the
media clip will slowly dim between the two keyframe moments.

Modifying and Removing Keyframes

At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
clip's properties, or dragging it to another position on the timeline. To remove a
keyframe, select it on the timeline and then click .

123
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: if you want to reset the changes made at a keyframe, just ensure the
keyframe is selected and then click next to the option/parameter you
want to reset back to the original.

Muting Audio
You can mute the audio in a video clip (or in any audio clip on the timeline) simply
by right-clicking on it in the timeline and then selecting Mute Clip. If you added any
audio volume keys previously, they are hidden.
To restore sound to the clip, right-click on the clip and then deselect Mute Clip.
Note: if you would like to mute the audio of an entire track, right-click on the
track and then select M ute Track. This is useful if you have video on a PiP
track and you don't want any of its audio in your final production.

Advanced Audio Editing

You can edit the audio in your video production in CyberLink AudioDirector* and/
or WaveEditor*, depending on your preference and which one is installed on your
computer. CyberLink AudioDirector and WaveEditor are companion programs that
let you perform more advanced editing on your audio clips.
To edit an audio clip in CyberLink AudioDirector or WaveEditor, do this:
1. Select an audio or a video clip (with audio) on the timeline, click the Edit
Audio* button above the timeline, and then select AudioDirector or
WaveEditor. The CyberLink AudioDirector/WaveEditor program opens.
2. Perform the edits on the audio clip as necessary. Please consult the help file
within the program directly for detailed information on editing audio.
3. Once you finish editing the audio file in CyberLink AudioDirector/WaveEditor,
exit the program, and then click Yes to save your changes and import your
edited audio clip back into the timeline.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

124
 Editing Yo ur M edia

Time Info
When a DV-AVI video clip captured from a DV tape camcorder or an EXIF image is
added to the timeline, the Time Info button is enabled. Click the Time Info button
to enable the date or time stamp (displayed as an image) that was captured from
the original camcorder or digital camera. You may also add a text remark to your
video or image if required.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector does not support the enabling of running
time codes on video files.

Magic Fix
With Magic Fix CyberLink PowerDirector can auto stabilize videos taken with shaky
hands, enhance a video's audio, or the quality of a video's image. Magic Fix can
also auto remove red-eye from photos, or improve the clarity on photos that are
out of focus.
To use Magic Fix to fix and edit a media clip, select it on the timeline, click on the
button above the timeline, and then select Magic Fix.

Click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information on using
these features.

Magic Cut
You can use Magic Cut* to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto-edit your video clips
using video technology that locates and keeps the most interesting moments,
while discarding sections of lesser importance. The Magic Cut tool is ideal for
condensing long video segments into shorter clips. For example Magic Cut can edit
a one hour video down to ten minutes.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To use Magic Cut on a video clip, select it on the timeline, click on the
button above the timeline, and then select Magic Cut.

125
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information on using this
feature.

126
 Adding Effects

Chapter 9:

Adding Effects
You can add many different kinds of effects to your video production, including
video effects that you apply to a portion or the entire media clip. Use Magic Motion
to apply a motion effect to images in your video production, or the Magic Style and
Freeze Frame features to auto create some effects for you.

Adding Video Effects

Select the button to open the Effect Room and access over 100 effects you can
add to your images and video clips. Each effect has unique attributes that you can
customize to help achieve the impression you want in your video production.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector includes the video effects lens flare, tilt
shift, water reflection, and magnifier. You can find these effects by clicking
on the Special tag in the explorer view.

CyberLink PowerDirector includes many video effects from NewBlue*. To view

these effects, select the NewBlue Art Effects filter from the drop-down in the
effects library. To view extra help and information about these effects, add them to
your production, select them, and then click the Modify button. In the Effect
Settings panel, select the Help and Information buttons for more detailed
information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

To insert a video effect to a portion of a clip in the timeline, do one of the

following:

select an effect in the Effect Room and then click to add it

to the effect track at the current position of the timeline slider.
Note: videos effects in the effect track are applied to all the video tracks
that are positioned above it in the timeline.

drag an effect from the Effect Room into the effect track directly beneath the
clips on the tracks that you want to apply it to.

127
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

right-click on an effect and select Add to Timeline to add it to the current

position of the timeline slider.

click and then select Apply Random Video Effect to add a random video
effect at the current position of the timeline slider.
When adding an effect to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if the
timeline slider is over an existing effect, or you drop it on an existing effect, you are
prompted to do one of the following:
Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing effect with the newly added effect.
Insert: select to split the effect and insert the new effect between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the effects on the same
track to the right.
Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the effect and insert the new effect
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted effect, right.
Note: once an effect is added to the effect track, select it and then click the
M odify button to edit the effect's settings. See Modifying a Video Effect for
more information.

To add a video effect to an entire media, PiP object, or title template clip in the
timeline, do this:
Note: video effects cannot be added to an entire paint animation or particle
effect clip.

select an effect in the Effect Room, drag it to a video track, and then drop it
on top of the media, PiP object, or title effect clip you want to apply it to. The
video effect is applied to the entire duration of the clip.
Note: to modify the settings of a video effect applied to the entire clip,
select the clip on the timeline and then click the Effect button. See
Modifying a Video Effect for more information.

Modifying a Video Effect

Many video effects let you customize their properties, such as the intensity,
position, and much more. You can customize a video effect for the entire duration
(clip mode) or customize it using keyframes (keyframe mode).
To modify a video effect, double click on it in the timeline or select it and then

128
 Adding Effects

click Modify. To modify a video effect that is applied to an entire clip, select the clip
and then click the Effect button above the timeline.

You can modify video effects in one of two modes:

Note: the type of modifications that are available in the Effect Settings
panel are completely dependent on the effect you selected.

Clip Mode: when the Effect Settings panel first opens, it displays in clip mode.
Any changes you make to the effect's settings are applied for the entire
duration of the effect. Use the available sliders and options to customize the
video effect to your preference.
Keyframe Mode*: some effects utilize keyframes to customize an effect's
settings. Keyframes are frames of your video that define the start and end
points of an effect, for example the intensity of an effect between two
keyframes. To customize an effect in keyframe mode, click the Keyframe
button in the Effect Settings panel. See Utilizing Keyframes on Media for
detailed information on using keyframes to customize effects in your
production.
Note: to remove an effect applied to an entire clip, deselect the effect name
in the Effect Settings panel when in Clip Mode. * optional feature in
CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for
detailed versioning information.

Using Magic Motion

CyberLink PowerDirector's Magic Motion tool adds zooms or pans to images,
creating a motion effect in your final video. You can select from a number of
motion templates for each photo in your project, or use the Magic Motion Designer
to customize the motion to your liking.
To use Magic Motion, do this:

1. Select an image on the timeline, click the button above the

timeline, and then select Magic Motion. The Magic Motion panel opens.
2. Select one of the available Magic Motion templates.
3. Use the preview player controls to preview the applied motion template.
4. If required, click on the Motion Designer button to customize the motion in
the Magic Motion Designer.

129
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Magic Motion Designer

After you select a motion template to apply to the selected image, select the
Motion Designer* button to customize the motion in the Magic Motion Designer.

A - Focus Area , B - Tim eline Indica tor, C - M otion Pa th, D - Rota tion Am ount, E - Focus Area Preview , F
- Zoom In/Out, G - TV Sa fe Zone/Grid Lines, H - Keyfra m e Buttons, I - Keyfra m e Tim eline
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

The Magic Motion Designer uses keyframes to customize the motion on an image.
Keyframes are frames of your video that define the start and end points of an
effect, which in this example is motion, rotation, or size of the focus area.

130
 Adding Effects

In the Magic Motion Designer you can:

use the player controls or drag the slider to preview the current motion in the
preview window.

click on to add keyframes to the keyframe timeline. By adding

keyframes you can alter the motion, rotation, or size of the focus area
between two points on the keyframe timeline.

click on to duplicate the previous or next keyframe on the keyframe

timeline. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the
new position.
resize the focus area at keyframe positions on the keyframe timeline to define
the areas on the image you want to highlight or focus on.
click and drag the motion path to alter the movement of the focus area.
add a rotation effect at keyframe positions on the keyframe timeline by
entering the rotation amount in the field provided and then pressing the Enter
key on your keyboard. You can also click and drag on top of the focus
area to rotate the focus area manually.

click on to to zoom in or out on the preview window. Zooming in

is useful for precise movement of motion, while you can zoom out if you
want to start the motion off screen.

click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the precise
placement of the focus area on the image. Select Snap to Reference Lines to
have the focus area snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and boundary of the
video area.

Using Magic Style

With Magic Style you can auto create professional looking videos using pre-
designed style templates. Magic Style includes pre-designed opening sequences,
transitions, and effects to automatically generate professional-looking videos on
your timeline.
Note: the Magic Style templates with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D
mode and when outputted in 3D video productions.

131
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

To use Magic Style to add effects and some style to media clips in your video
production, select them on the timeline, click the button above the
timeline, and then select Magic Style.

Click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information on using this
feature.
Note: if you want more creative control than the Magic Style provides, you
can also use the Theme Designer to create your video production. The
Theme Designer allows you to customize the theme templates used and
choose the exact photos, video clips, and background music you want in
your production. See Using the Theme Designer for more information.

Using the Freeze Frame Effect

Right-click on a video clip on the timeline, select Edit Video/Photo and then Freeze
Frame to instantly create a freeze frame effect. CyberLink PowerDirector takes a
snapshot of the current frame of video and then inserts it into the timeline, along
with a video and title effect, creating a freeze frame effect. Edit the inserted image
and effects to your specification to ensure the freeze frame effect fits your
requirements.
You can choose to not have CyberLink PowerDirector insert the effects by
deselecting the option in preferences. See Editing Preferences for more
information.

132
 Creating PiP Effects

Chapter 10:

Creating PiP Effects

In CyberLink PowerDirector there are many PiP (picture in picture) effects you can
create and use in your video production. PiP effects not only include the use of PiP
objects, but also adding motion or modifying the properties of media clips on any
track in timeline, creating custom hand drawn paint animation objects in the Paint
Designer, using the chroma key effect, and much more.

Adding PiP Objects

Click the button to open the PiP Objects Room to access a library of PiP
objects, or graphics, that you can add on top of the video or images on a video
track.
Note: the PiP Objects Room also includes paint animation objects. See
Using the Paint Designer for more information.

To insert a PiP object, or paint animation object, to the timeline, do one of the
following:
Note: you can download additional PiP and paint animation objects from
the DirectorZone web site. See Downloading from DirectorZone for more
information.

use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the PiP or paint
animation object, select it in the library, and then click to
add it to the selected video track.
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the PiP or paint
animation object, right-click on it in the library, and then select Add to
Timeline to add it to the selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a PiP or paint animation object to a desired
position on a video track to add it to the timeline.

When adding a PiP or paint animation object to the timeline (inserting or dragging
and dropping), if the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an
existing clip, you are prompted to use one of these ripple editing options to insert
the clip:

133
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the PiP/paint animation
object.
Insert: select to split the clip and insert the PiP object/paint animation object
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips
on the same track to the right.
Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the PiP/paint
animation object between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also
moves all of the media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted
clip, right.
Crossfade: select to lay the PiP/paint animation object over a portion of the
existing clip and auto add a fade transition between the two clips.
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
Replace: select to replace a current clip on the timeline with the PiP or paint
animation object. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of
the current content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the PiP or paint animation object, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically
resizes it to fit the original clip's duration.

If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when
inserting a PiP or paint animation object, you are prompted to use this ripple
editing option to insert the clip:
Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the PiP/paint animation object to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Once added to the timeline, select the PiP object and then click the Modify button
to edit its placement, motion, and more in the PiP Designer. See Modifying Media
in the PiP Designer for more information. For information on setting the amount of
time the PiP effect appears in your video production, see Setting a Media Clip's
Duration.

Creating Custom PiP Objects

You can create a custom PiP object using your own graphics and images. To create
a custom PiP object, do this:

134
 Creating PiP Effects

1. Click on to open the PiP Objects room.

2. In the PiP Objects room, click on .

3. Select the image file on your computer you want to use.
4. Click Open to import it and open the PiP Designer. See Modifying Media in the
PiP Designer for details on editing the object's properties in the PiP Designer.

135
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Using the Paint Designer

The Paint Designer* lets you create hand drawn paint animation objects (such as
your written signature) on top of a color board, image, or video clip in your video
production.

Click on and then to open the Paint Designer.

A - Pa int Settings, B - Pa int Ca nva s, C - Freeze Tim e, D - Uploa d to DirectorZone, D - Ca pture Controls,
E - Tools, F - Set Brush Width, G - Set Brush Color
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

136
 Creating PiP Effects

Creating a Paint Animation

To create a new hand drawn paint animation template, do this:

1. Click on and then to open the Paint Designer.

2. Select the type of brush in the Tools area that you want to use. Each tool
creates a different looking line.
3. Use the slider to set the width of the drawn line.
4. In the Color area, hover your mouse over the color band and then use the eye
dropper to set the color of the drawn line.

Or click the colored box beside the color band to select it from the color
palette.

5. Before you start drawing, be sure to set the Paint Settings as follows:
Brush mode: select to draw on the paint canvas with the selected tool.
Inverse mode: select to switch the paint canvas background to a solid color,
which you erase as you draw.

Show current timeline image as background: insert a media clip on the

timeline, use the timeline slider to find a frame you want to use as a
background, and then select this option to use it as a guideline when
drawing. The background image is not included in the paint animation
object.

6. If required, input a Freeze time in the field provided. This time should equal
the duration you want the finished drawing to be displayed at the very end of
the resulting paint animation object.

7. Click the button and then start drawing on the paint canvas. CyberLink
PowerDirector captures your mouse strokes to create a paint animation

137
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

object.
8. When you are done, click on again. Use the player controls to preview
your paint animation object if required.
9. Select the Insert at current timeline position option if you want to insert the
saved paint animation object at the current position on the timeline when
you are done.
10. Once you are satisfied, click on the Save button to save it to the PiP Objects
library. When prompted to save, enter a custom name for the new paint
animation, use the slider to select the frame in the paint animation you want
to use as its thumbnail in the library, and then click OK.

Editing Paint Animation Templates

At anytime you can edit the paint animation templates that are in the PiP objects
library. Just select the paint animation and then click on .
When editing a paint animation template, you can:
use the player controls to preview the paint animation.

click the button to add more content to the end of the drawing.

click the button to take a snapshot of a frame in the paint animation, and
save it as a new image in the media library.

Saving and Sharing Paint Animation

Templates
Once you are finished modifying/customizing a paint animation template you can
save it in your PiP objects library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it
with others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up

on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Paint Animation Templates
for more information.

138
 Creating PiP Effects

click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the disc

menu library.
click on Save to save a new template to the disc menu library.

Sharing and Backing Up Paint Animation Templates

You can share your customized paint animation templates with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them
on CyberLink Cloud.

To share and back up your paint animation templates, do this:

1. Do either of the following:
in the Paint Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.

select the paint animation template in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
Style: select a style or category for the template.
Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two
words as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".

Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.

139
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.

Modifying Media in the PiP

Designer
When you add a video clip, image, or PiP object to a video track you can apply PiP
effects to it in the PiP Designer*. PiP (picture-in-picture) effects include making
your media transparent, applying borders, shadows, chroma key (green screen),
motion, motion blur, and more.
To open the PiP Designer, select a video clip, image, or PiP object on the timeline
and then click the Modify button.

A - PiP Effect Properties Ta b, B - PiP Effect Properties, C - M otion Ta b, D - PiP M a sks Ta b, E - PiP Object,

140
 Creating PiP Effects

F - Ba ckground Video, G - M ode Selection, H - Zoom Tools, I - TV Sa fe Zone/Grid Lines, J - Uploa d to

Internet, K - PiP/Keyfra m e Tim eline
Note: if you have trouble clearly seeing some elements of the media you
are modifying in the PiP Designer because they blend into the background,
try selecting the Only show the selected track option to change the
preview background.
You can also open the PiP Designer by:

clicking on in the PiP Objects room to create a new PiP object template
from scratch by importing a custom image.
selecting an existing PiP object in the PiP Objects room, and then clicking on
to edit the template.

Mode Selection and Zoom Tools

When modifying PiP media in the PiP Designer use the mode selection and zoom
tools for assistance.
Note: when modifying PiP media in the PiP Designer, use the player
controls to preview, and click to preview the effect at full screen.

Mode Selection
In the PiP Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to enable
the PiP media selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the PiP
media to different areas of the video frame.

Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the PiP
Designer. This mode is especially helpful when applying PiP motion effects to
media that start off screen.

Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying PiP media. You can also select the viewer zoom amount from the
drop-down to set the size of the PiP media preview. Select Fit to resize the PiP

141
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

media so that is fits in the PiP Designer's viewer window.

Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the PiP media.

Modifying PiP Media Size and Position

You can change the size, position, and orientation of the media clip or object in a
PiP effect. The resizing options are unrestricted. You can reduce the clip to
miniature size or enlarge it to completely obscure any underlying media content on
the timeline.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the PiP effect on the video. Select Snap to
Reference Lines to have the PiP effect snap to the grid lines, TV safe
zone, and boundary of the video area.
To modify PiP media size, position, or orientation:
click and drag a corner or side to resize the PiP media.
Note: click the Aspect Ratio item on the Properties tab, and then deselect
M aintain aspect ratio to resize the media clip or PiP object more freely.

click on the PiP media and drag it to a new position.

click on above the PiP media and drag it left or right to change its
orientation.
click and drag the blue nodes in corners to change its shape. See Changing
the Shape of Media for more information.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize the size and shape of PiP
media. See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.

Modifying PiP Media Properties

Click on the PiP effect Properties tab to change the properties of the PiP media. See
the following sections for detailed information on the properties you can modify
on this tab.
Changing Object Settings

142
 Creating PiP Effects

Using Chroma Key

Applying a Shadow
Adding a Reflection
Applying a Border
Flipping PiP Media
Enabling 3D Depth
Applying Fades
Note: while modifying the PiP effect properties, you can select the Only
show the selected track option to hide any other media that is displayed in
the preview window while modifying.

Changing Object Settings

Use the Object Settings option to change some of the basic properties of the PiP
media. Use the Opacity slider to set the desired transparency of the PiP media, or
the Scale sliders to change its size.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize each of the object settings. See
Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.

You can use the X and Y Position fields to set the precise location of the top left
corner of the PiP media on the video image. To rotate the PiP media, enter an angle
degree in the Rotation field and then press the Enter key on your keyboard.
Note: select the M aintain aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the
PiP media's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing
it. Deselect this option if you want to change the PiP media's shape or alter
its aspect ratio.

Using Chroma Key

Select the Chroma Key option to add a chroma key (green screen) effect to your PiP
media. Once enable, do this:

1. Click on and then select the color in the image or video clip that you
want to replace/make transparent.

143
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

2. Adjust the Tolerance of hue, Tolerance of saturation, and Tolerance of

luminance sliders to remove the selected color/background (green screen).
Adjust until the image or video behind your PiP media is completely revealed,
without any loss of quality on the PiP media.
3. Use the Edge sharpness slider to fine tune the edges of the PiP media on the
revealed background. Using this slider can make the PiP effect look more
authentic by sharpening the edges.

Applying a Shadow
Select the Shadow* option to add a shadow on the PiP media. Available options
allow you to change the shadow's color, direction, and distance from the PiP effect.
You can also set the transparency and blur levels of the shadow using the available
sliders.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to reflect the PiP media onto the background media.
Use the Distance slider to set space between the reflection and the PiP media. Use
the Transparency slider to set the opacity of the reflection.

Applying a Border
Select the Border option to add a border around the PiP media. Use the Size slider
to set the width of the border, and the Blur and Transparency sliders to customize
its appearance.

Selecting Border Color

When selecting the color of the border, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired

144
 Creating PiP Effects

border color.
2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction
control to set which way the color flows.
4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the border to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the border.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Flipping PiP Media

Select the Flip option to flip the PiP media upside down or from left to right,
depending on your requirement.

Enabling 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings* option to give the
PiP media a 3D effect.

Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the PiP media to
have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D PiP object seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).
Note: you can use keyframes to customize when the 3D depth is applied.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.

Applying Fades
Select the Fades option to apply a fade effect on the PiP media. Select whether to

145
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the PiP media.

Note: when a fade is applied, note that keyframes are added to the
Transparency keyframe timeline so you can customize the length of the
fade, if required. See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.

Adding Motion to PiP Media

Click on the Motion tab to add motion* to PiP media, allowing it to move across
the screen. You can choose from a number of predefined motion paths or create
your own custom PiP motion. You can also add a rotation effect to the PiP media.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Adding PiP Effects With Predefined Motion

To add a predefined motion to a PiP media, select the motion path template in the
list that fits your requirements. Note that keyframes are added to the Motion track
of the PiP Designer keyframe timeline. See Customizing PiP Motion and Utilizing
PiP Keyframes for detailed information on using keyframes to customize PiP
motion.

Customizing PiP Motion

The PiP Designer uses keyframes to customize the motion of PiP media. Keyframes
are frames of your video that define the start and end points of an effect, which in
this example is motion.
Note: some PiP objects have predefined motion already applied.

To customize the motion of PiP media:

Note: once you are done customizing the PiP media motion you can use the
motion blur effect to make it look smother and more natural. See Applying
Motion Blur for more information.

drag an existing keyframe to a new location in the preview window. The PiP
media will follow the modified path to get to the changed keyframe position.

146
 Creating PiP Effects

drag the path line to alter the path the PiP media takes to get to the next
keyframe.

use the player controls to find a position on the motion path, and then click
on the Motion track of the keyframe timeline to add a new keyframe at a new
position, if required.

Customizing the Speed of PiP Effect Motion

You have full control over the speed to the PiP media's motion. The following three
factors determine the speed of the PiP media's motion.

Duration of the PiP Clip in the Timeline

The longer the duration of PiP media clip, the slower the PiP object's motion is. For
example, if the PiP media clip is 10 seconds, it takes the PiP media 10 seconds to
travel from the first Motion keyframe to the last Motion keyframe.

Distance Between Keyframes

The distance between each keyframe also contributes to the speed of the PiP media
motion. The further the distance between each keyframe, the quicker the PiP media
needs to move to get to the next keyframe.

147
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Keyframe Timeline
The keyframe timeline is located below the preview window. Each keyframe in the
motion path has a corresponding marker on the keyframe timeline.

If the PiP media clip on the timeline has a duration of 10 seconds, the keyframe
timeline is 10 seconds long. To increase the speed of a PiP media's motion, drag a
keyframe marker closer to previous keyframe marker.

Saving a Custom PiP Motion Path

Once you finish modifying your PiP motion path you can save it for future use. To

save a motion path, click on to save it as a custom path. It is then available

in motion path list the next time you want to use it.

Customizing PiP Effect Rotation

Select the Rotation Settings option to customize the rotation of moving PiP media.
Use the slider to set the amount the PiP media will rotate as it moves across the
screen. Select whether PiP media rotates counter clockwise, or clockwise.

148
 Creating PiP Effects

Note: click the button to reset the rotation amount to 0. Any added
rotation is removed.

Applying Motion Blur

Select the Motion blur option to make PiP media movement appear smoother,
giving it a more natural and authentic look.
Once selected, use the available sliders as follows:
Blur length: drag this slider to set the duration (number of frames) you want
blended into a single frame (the blur). Dragging the slider right will apply
more of a blur to the moving PiP media.
Blur density: drag this slider to set the number of samples (of PiP media) used
per frame. Dragging the slider right will make the PiP media less blurry as it
adds samples to fill the missing content caused by the movement.

Adding PiP Masks

Masks are useful if you want to show/hide portions of your media on the timeline
in the final production. Click on the Mask tab and then select a mask from the list
to overlay portions of the PiP media. Click the Create Mask button to import and
create your own custom mask by importing any image in the .PNG format.
Click and drag the edges of the mask to move and resize it, or select Invert mask to
invert the portion of the media that is being masked. Use the Feather radius slider if
you want to adjust the softness on the mask's edges.

Object Settings
Use the Object Settings option to change some of the basic properties of the mask.
Use the Mask Opacity slider to set the desired transparency of the mask, or the
Mask Scale slider to change its size. You can use the X and Y Mask Position fields to
set the precise location of the top left corner of the mask on the video image.
Note: select the M aintain mask aspect ratio option if you want to ensure
the mask's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing it.
Deselect this option if you want to change the mask's shape or alter its
aspect ratio.

149
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Utilizing PiP Keyframes

Use keyframes when modifying your PiP media to define the start and end points
of the customized effects. In the PiP Designer you can use keyframes to change the
PiP media clip's opacity, size (scale), rotation, motion, shape (freeform), and 3D
depth.
Note: once you have customized the effects on PiP media using keyframes,
you can right click on the clip in the timeline and select Copy Keyframe
Attributes. This allows you to paste all of its keyframe attributes (including
motion) onto another clip in the timeline, applying the same effects to the
clip.

Keyframe Timeline
A custom keyframe timeline is generated for each PiP media clip when you open it
in the PiP Designer. In the below example, because the media clip is 10 seconds
long on the project timeline, the keyframe timeline is also 10 seconds.

If you'd like to view the movie timeline, click the button.

The keyframe timeline lets you precisely place each keyframe, so you can time the
applied effect in your movie production.

150
 Creating PiP Effects

Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your PiP media clip where you
want its properties to change.

2. Click next to the property you want to change to add a keyframe to the
corresponding keyframe track.

Note that keyframes are also added at the start and end of the keyframe track.
3. Use the features in the PiP Designer to modify the properties of the effect as
required for this keyframe. In this example we are modifying the opacity of
the PiP media clip at the first keyframe.
When previewed, at the first keyframe the PiP media is the completely
transparent, and then slowly gets more opaque until it reaches the specified
opacity level by the time the playback slider reaches the second keyframe.
It will maintain this opacity until the playback slider reaches the last keyframe,
unless you add more keyframes or change the properties of the last keyframe.
Note: you can also modify the properties of a keyframe by right clicking on
it and selecting Duplicate Previous Keyframe or Duplicate Next
Keyframe. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the
keyframe you right clicked on.
4. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes to modify the PiP media clip's properties and
motion.

Modifying and Removing Keyframes

At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
PiP media clip's properties, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on the

151
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

keyframe timeline.

To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .

Saving and Sharing PiP Objects

Once you are finished modifying/customizing a PiP object you can save it to your
PiP objects library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with others,
or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up

on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up PiP Objects for more
information.
click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the PiP
Objects Room.
click on Save to save a new template to the PiP Objects Room.

Sharing and Backing Up PiP Objects

You can share your customized PiP objects with other CyberLink PowerDirector
users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them on
CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your PiP objects, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
in the PiP Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.

select the PiP object in the library, and then click .

2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.

152
 Creating PiP Effects

Style: select a style or category for the template.

Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two
words as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".

Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.

153
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

154
 Adding Particle Effects

Chapter 11:

Adding Particle Effects

Click the button to open the Particle Effects Room to access a library of effects
you can place on a video track to add a particle effect (snow, cloud cover, fire
effects, and more) on top of a video or image.
To insert a particle effect to the timeline, do one of the following:
Note: you can download additional particle effects from the DirectorZone
web site. See Downloading from DirectorZone for more information.

use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the particle effect,
select it in the library, and then click to add it to the
selected video track.
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the particle effect,
right-click on it in the library, and then select Add to Timeline to add it to the
selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a particle effect to a desired position on a
video track to add it to the timeline.
When adding a particle effect to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping),
if the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you
are prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the particle effect.
Insert: select to split the clip and insert the particle effect between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same
track to the right.
Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the particle effect
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
Crossfade: select to lay the particle effect over a portion of the existing clip
and auto add a fade transition between the two clips.

155
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
Replace: select to replace a current clip on the timeline with the particle
effect. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the current
content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the particle effect, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically resizes it to fit
the original clip's duration.

If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when
inserting a particle effect, you are prompted to use this ripple editing option to
insert the clip:
Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the particle effect to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Once added to the timeline, select the particle effect and then click the Modify
button to edit its properties in the Particle Designer. See Modifying Particle Effects
in the Particle Designer for more information. For information on setting the
amount of time the particle effect appears in your video production, see Setting a
Media Clip's Duration.

156
 Adding Particle Effects

Modifying Particle Effects in the

Particle Designer
You can completely customize particle effects, and all of its particle object
properties, in the Particle Designer*. To open the Particle Designer, select a particle
effect on the timeline and then click the Modify button.

A - Pa rticle Object Properties Ta b, B - Pa rticle Object Properties, C - Pa rticle Object M otion Ta b, D -

Add Objects, Im a ges, Ba ckgrounds, E - Pa rticle Object, F - Ba ckground Video, G - M ode Selection, H -
Zoom Tools, I - TV Sa fe Zone/Grid Lines, J - Uploa d to Internet, K - Pa rticle Effect Tim eline
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

157
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

You can also open the Particle Designer by:

clicking on in the Particle Room to create a new particle effect template

from scratch by importing a custom image.

selecting a particle effect in the Particle Room and then clicking on the
button to edit it.

Mode Selection and Zoom Tools

When modifying particle effects in the Particle Designer use the mode selection
and zoom tools for assistance.
Note: when modifying particle effects in the Particle Designer, use the
player controls to preview, and click to preview the effect at full screen.

Mode Selection
In the Particle Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to
enable the object selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the
particle objects, images, etc. to different areas of the video frame.

Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the Particle
Designer. This mode is especially helpful when applying particle motion effects if
the object starts off screen.

Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying the particle effect. You can also select the viewer zoom amount
from the drop-down to set the size of the particle effect preview. Select Fit to resize
the particle effect so that is fits in the Particle Designer's viewer window.
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the particle effect.

158
 Adding Particle Effects

Adding Objects, Images, and

Backgrounds
Each particle effect template can contain one or more particle objects, or attributes
that create the desired effect. It may also include a background and other images.
Note: you can give all the added objects, images, and backgrounds custom
names in the Particle Designer to make them easily identifiable in the
keyframe timeline. Just enter the desired name in the Selected object
field.

Adding New Particle Objects

You can add additional particle objects to a particle effect template.

To add a new particle object to a particle effect, click on the button. CyberLink
PowerDirector adds a default particle object to the particle effect template. See
Modifying Particle Object Properties for more information on customizing the
default particle object to fit the particle effect you are trying to create.

Adding Images
You can insert your own images into your particle effect template.
To add a image, do this:

1. Click on the button.

2. Browse to and then select the image on your computer you want to add, and
then click Open.
3. Once added, resize and reposition the image in the Particle Designer as
required.

Setting Backgrounds
Your particle effect can consist of a background that the particle objects emit over.
You can choose from the default backgrounds, or import your own custom
background.

159
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

To set a background, do this:

1. Click on the button.

2. Select:
Add Default Background Image: if you want to select one of the backgrounds
provided with your copy of CyberLink PowerDirector. Select the background,
and then click Open.
Add Custom Background Image: if you want to import your own custom
background. Select the background, and then click Open.
3. When prompted, set the adjustment settings for the background, as required.
Note: to remove the imported background image, just click the
button.

Modifying Particle Object Range and

Position
You can increase the range of the particle object so that it covers more of the
background, or modify the position or direction particles fall/emit from their
source point. You can also change the position and size of images and
backgrounds used in the effect.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the particle object on the video. Select Snap to
Reference Lines to have the particle effect snap to the grid lines, TV safe
zone, and boundary of the video area.
To modify range and position of objects, image, and backgrounds in a particle
effect, do this:

to change the position and source (emit) point of a particle object, select the
particle object in the keyframe timeline, and then click and drag to a new
position.
if the particle effect has an image, select the Image track in the keyframe
timeline. Next click and drag a corner or side to resize the image. Click on
to drag the image to a new position, if required.
to rotate a particle object, select it in the keyframe timeline, and then click

160
 Adding Particle Effects

and drag to the desired orientation.

to change the range and direction an effect emits from the particle object's
source point, select the particle object in the keyframe timeline, and then
click and drag to a new position.

Modifying Particle Object Properties

Click on the particle object Properties tab to change the properties of the selected
particle object. See the following sections for detailed information on the
properties you can modify on this tab.
Selecting Emit Method
Selecting Particle Style
Adding/Deleting Particles
Modifying Parameters
Enabling 3D Depth
Adding Color
Applying Fades

Selecting Emit Method

Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Emit Method option
to select how the particles emit from the source point. You can have them emit
from a single point, from a line, or spray out in a circle.

Select the Mask option, and then select a mask from the list (or click to
import a custom mask image) to create a masked area where particles emit from.
Depending on the mask you select/import and how you resize it, the particles will
emit differently.

Selecting Particle Style

Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Particle Style option
to select the style of the emitting particle object. Depending on the property you
select, the particle shape and behavior changes. Select the style that best suits the

161
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

effect you are trying to accomplish.

Adding/Deleting Particles
Particle objects can consist of one or more particles, or small customizable images.
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Add/Delete Particles
option to add or remove individual particles from a particle object.

Click on and then select Insert a Default Image if you want to select one of the
particle images provided with your copy of CyberLink PowerDirector. Select Insert a
Custom Image if you want to import your own custom particle image. You can add
as many custom particles as you like to a particle object.

Select an existing particle and then click to delete it from the particle object.

Modifying Parameters
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Modify Parameters
option to completely customize the properties of the particle object as follows:
Note: you can use keyframes to customize the parameters of particle
objects. See Utilizing Particle Keyframes for more information.

Emit rate: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the rate
or speed particles emit from the source point.
Max count: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
number of particles that emit from the source point.
Life: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the life, or
how long the particle displays in the effect. The lower the number, the shorter
amount of time each particle displays before fading out. For example, if you
enter 100, the life will equal the entire length of the clip.
Life variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
amount of variation there is in particle life. For example, if you enter 50, then
half of the particles will die out before they meet the specified life amount.
Size: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the size of the
particle.

162
 Adding Particle Effects

Size variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
amount of variation there is in particle size. For example, if you enter 50, then
half of the particles will equal the defined size.
Speed: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the speed
of the particle.
Speed variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set
the amount of variation there is in particle speed. For example, if you enter 50,
then half of the particles will have the defined speed.
Wave (amplitude): use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided if you
want your particle to travel in a wave pattern. The higher the number, the
bigger the amplitude of the wave. If the value is 0, then the particle travels in a
straight line.
Wave (amplitude) variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box
provided to set the amount of variation there is in wave's amplitude. For
example, if you enter 50, then half of the particles will have the same
amplitude.
Wave (frequency): use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided if you
want your particle to travel in a wave pattern. The higher the number, the
larger the frequency of the wave. If the value is 0, then the particle travels in a
straight line.
Wave (frequency) variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box
provided to set the amount of variation there is in wave's frequency. For
example, if you enter 50, then half of the particles will have the same
frequency.
Symmetry: use the slider or enter in a value to set the symmetry of the wave.
The higher the value, the more asymmetrical the wave will be.
Rotation speed: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
rotation speed of the particle. The higher the value, the faster it rotates.
Depending on whether the parameter has a positive or negative value
determines the direction of the rotation.
Rotation speed variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided
to set the amount of variation there is in the particle's rotation speed. For
example, if you enter 50, then half of the particles will have the same rotation
speed.
Gravity: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the

163
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

amount of gravity applied to the particle. Depending on whether the

parameter has a positive or negative value determines the direction of the
gravitational pull.

Enabling 3D Depth
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the 3D Settings* option if
you are creating a 3D video production and want the particle object to have a 3D
effect.
Select Enable 3D depth to enable, and then use the slider to set the amount of
depth you want the particle object to have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make
the 3D particle object seem nearer to the audience (in the foreground), while
dragging it right will make it appear farther away (in the background).

Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Adding Color
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Color option if you
want to add or change the color of the particles. To do this, select Enable color and
then set the following options:
Select color: click the colored box to select the color of the selected particle
object.
Opacity: use this slider to set the opacity or transparency level of the particle
object.
Enable particle overlay: select this option to enable an overlay on colored
particles to change their appearance, if required.

Applying Fades
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Fades option to apply
a fade effect to it. Select whether to enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the particle
object.

164
 Adding Particle Effects

When a fade is applied, note that a keyframe indicator is added to the particle
object's track on the keyframe timeline, indicating the duration of the fade.

You can click and drag the keyframe indicator to customize the duration of the
fade, if required.

Adding Motion to Particle Objects

Click on the Motion tab to add motion to particle objects, by enabling the particle's
source to move across the screen. You can choose from a number of predefined
motion paths or create your own custom motion path. The path properties of a
particle object are similar to a PiP object. See Adding Motion to PiP Effects for
detailed information on customizing a particle object's motion.

165
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Utilizing Particle Keyframes

Use keyframes when modifying particle object parameters to define the start and
end points of the customized effects.

Keyframe Timeline
A custom keyframe timeline is generated for each particle effect clip when you
open it in the Particle Designer. In the below example, because the particle effect
clip is 10 seconds long on the project timeline, the keyframe timeline is also 10
seconds.

If you'd like to view the movie timeline, click the button.

The keyframe timeline lets you precisely place each keyframe, so you can time the
applied effect in your movie production. You can also click and drag the beginning
of a particle object or image track in the keyframe timeline, to set precisely when
the effect first appears in the particle effect.

166
 Adding Particle Effects

Click and drag the end of the track to set when you want the effect to end.

Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your particle object where you
want its parameters to change.

2. In the Modify Parameters section on the Properties tab, click the button
next to the parameter you want to change.
3. If required, click the arrow next to the corresponding particle track to display
the parameter keyframe track.

4. Click next to the parameter you want to change to add a keyframe to the
parameter keyframe track.

167
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

5. Use the sliders in the Modify Parameters section to modify the parameters of
the object as required for this keyframe. In this example we are modifying the
emit rate of the particles from the source point at the second keyframe.
6. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes to modify the particle object parameters.

Modifying and Removing Keyframes

At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
particle object's parameters, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on
the keyframe timeline.

To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .

Saving and Sharing Particle Effect

Templates
Once you are finished modifying your particle effect template you can save it to
your particle effects library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with
others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up

on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Particle Effect Templates for
more information.
click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the Particle
Room.
click on Save to save a new template to the Particle Room.

168
 Adding Particle Effects

Sharing and Backing Up Particle Effect

Templates
You can share your customized particle effect templates with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them
on CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your particle effect templates, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
in the Particle Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom
template, and then click OK.

select the particle effect template in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
Style: select a style or category for the template.
Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two
words as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".

Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.

169
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

170
 Adding Title Effects

Chapter 12:

Adding Title Effects

Click the button to open the Title Room to access a library of title effect
templates, which when applied to your project, add credits or comments to your
production. You can add title effects to a video track or to the title track.
To insert a title effect to the timeline, do one of the following:
Note: once the latest content pack is installed, the Title Room includes title
sets, or groups of four themed title templates. These title sets are useful if
you want to add titles with themed animations that include video opening
and closing credits.
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the title, select the
title effect template in the library, and then click to add it
to the selected video track.
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the title, select the
title effect template in the library, and then click to add it
to the title track.
use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the title, right-click
on the title effect template in the library, and then select Add to Timeline to
add it to the title track.
You can also manually drag and drop a title effect template to a desired position on
the title track (or any video track) to add it to the timeline.
Note: you can now add video effects onto entire title effect clips in the
timeline, like any other media clip. See Adding Video Effects for more
information.

When adding a title effect to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if
the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you are
prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the title effect.
Insert: select to split the clip and insert the title effect between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same
track to the right.

171
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the title effect
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
Crossfade: select to lay the title effect over a portion of the existing clip and
auto add a fade transition between the two clips.
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
Replace: select to replace a current clip on the timeline with the title effect.
Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the current
content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the title effect, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically resizes it to fit the
original clip's duration.

If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when
inserting a title effect, you are prompted to use this ripple editing option to insert
the clip:
Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the title effect to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Once added to the timeline, select the title effect template and then click the
Modify button to edit it in the Title Designer. See Modifying Titles in the Title
Designer for more information. For information on setting the amount of time the
title effect appears in your video production, see Setting a Media Clip's Duration.

172
 Adding Title Effects

Modifying Titles in the Title

Designer
In the Title Designer you can completely customize the title effects in your project.
Title effects contain character presets, animation, and background options that you
can modify to fit your video project.
To open the Title Designer, select a title effect on the timeline and then click the
Modify button.

A - Text Properties Ta b, B - Title Properties, C - Text M otion Ta b, D - Insert Text/Im a ges/Pa rticles/
Ba ckgrounds, E - Title Text, F - M ode Selection, G - Ba ckground Video, H - Zoom Tools, I - TV Sa fe
Zone/Grid Lines, J - Align Objects, K - Uploa d to Internet, L - Title Keyfra m e Tim eline
You can also open the Title Designer by:

173
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

clicking on in the Title Room and then select:

2D Title to create a new 2D title template from scratch. See Modifying 2D
Text Properties for information on editing its title text properties.

3D-Like Title to create a new title template with 3D-Like effect properties.
See Modifying 3D-Like Text Properties for information on editing its title
text properties.

selecting an existing title effect in the Title Room and then clicking on to
edit the existing template.

Mode Selection and Zoom Tools

When modifying title effects in the Title Designer use the mode selection and zoom
tools for assistance.
Note: when modifying title effects in the Title Designer, use the player
controls to preview, and click to preview the effect at full screen.

Mode Selection
In the Title Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to enable
the object selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the title text,
particles, images, etc. to different areas of the video frame.

Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the Title
Designer. This mode is especially helpful if zoomed in on the title effect.

Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying the title effect. You can also select the viewer zoom amount from
the drop-down to set the size of the title effect preview. Select Fit to resize the title
effect so that is fits in the Title Designer's viewer window.

174
 Adding Title Effects

Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the title effect.

Adding Text, Particles, Images, and

Backgrounds
Each title effect template can contain one or more title text boxes. It can also
contain particle effects, images, and backgrounds that the text displays over.

Adding Title Text

You can add additional title text boxes that contain the text you want to display in
your video production.

To add new title text, click on the button and then click in the preview
window to add the title text box to the desired position. Type in the required text in
the new title text box.
See Modifying Title Text Properties for more information on customizing the
default title text properties to fit the title effect you are trying to create.

Adding Particle Effects

You can add particle effects to a title effect template.

To add a particle effect to a title effect, click on the button and then select
the particle effect you want to add to the template.
Note: the properties of particle effects cannot be modified once added to a
title template.

Adding Images
You can insert your own images into your title effect template.
To add a image, do this:

175
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

1. Click on the button.

2. Browse to and then select the image on your computer you want to add, and
then click Open.
3. Once added, resize and reposition the image in the Title Designer as required.
See Customizing Image Settings if you would like to use chroma key to make the
image in the title effect transparent.

Inserting Backgrounds
Your title effect can consist of a background that the title text displays over.
To set a background, do this:

1. Click on the button.

2. Browse to and then select the image on your computer you want to use as
the background, and then click Open.
3. When prompted, set the adjustment settings for the background, as required.

Note: to remove the imported background image, just click the

button.

Modifying Title Effect Position

You can change the position and orientation of the title text and images in a title
effect, quickly and easily.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the title effect on the master video. Select Snap to
Reference Lines to have the title effect snap to the grid lines, TV safe
zone, and boundary of the video area.
To modify title text and image position or orientation:
click on the title text or an image, and then drag it to a new position.

if editing a 2D title, click on above the title text or image, and drag it right
or left to change its orientation.
if the title effect contains an image, select it and then click and drag a corner

176
 Adding Title Effects

or side to resize the image.

Modifying Title Text Properties

Click on the title effect Text tab to change the properties of the selected title text.
The properties that are available on the tab depend on the type of title text you are
editing. See Modifying 2D Text Properties if you are editing 2D title text, or
Modifying 3D-Like Text Properties if editing 3D-Like title text.

Modifying 2D Text Properties

If you are creating or editing a 2D title effect template, on the text properties tab
you can modify everything from the text size, style, color, as well as adding
shadows, borders, motion blur, and much more.

Applying Character Presets to Title Text

Select the Character Presets option to apply a defined character preset to title text.
After you have applied a defined character preset you can refine it using the other
properties on the tab, if required.
To apply a character preset to title text, ensure the text box is selected in the
preview window and then click on a character preset in the list.
Note: once you are done customizing all of the text properties on the tab,

click on to save the character preset to your favorites. To find and

use saved character presets, select M y Favorites in the Character types
drop-down.

Customizing Font Type

Select the Font Type option to set the font type and size of the selected title text.
You can also select the font face color, bold or italicize text, change the line and
text spacing, and set the text alignment in the text box.
If the font type you are using supports it, you can select the Kerning check box to
reduce the space between the letters in the title text.

177
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Customizing Font Face

Select the Font Face option to customize the font color, blur, and transparency.
Once selected, use the Blur and Transparency sliders to customize its appearance.
When customizing the font face color, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
Uniform color: select this option if you want the font to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired font
color.
2 color gradient: select this option if you want the font color to change from
one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set the
beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction control to
set which way the color flows.
4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the font to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the text.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to add a reflection of the title text onto the background
media. Use the Distance slider to set space between the reflection and the title text.
Use the Transparency slider to set the opacity of the reflection.

Applying Font Shadow

Select the Font Shadow option to add a shadow to the title text. Available options
allow you to change the shadow's color, direction, distance from the text, and add
a transparency or blur effect.

Applying Border
Select the Border option to add a border around the title text. Available options

178
 Adding Title Effects

allow you to change the border's size, and add a transparency or blur effect.
You can customize the border color using the following options in the Fill type
drop-down:
Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired
border color.
2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction
control to set which way the color flows.
4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the border to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the border.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Enabling 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings* to give the title
text a 3D effect.

Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the title text to
have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D title text seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).

Customizing Image Settings

If your title effect contains an image, select it in the preview window, and then click
the Image Settings option to customize it.
To apply a chroma key (green screen) effect on the image, select Apply chroma key.

179
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Next, click on and then select the color in the image that you want to replace/
make transparent. Use the Tolerance of intensity and Tolerance of hue sliders to set
the level of chroma key applied, revealing the content behind the selected image.
Select Enable flip object if you want to to flip the image in the title text upside
down or from left to right, depending on your requirement. You can also enable a
fade effect on the image. Select whether to enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the
image.
Note: when a fade is applied, note that keyframes are added to the Opacity
keyframe timeline so you can customize the length of the fade, if required.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.

Changing Object Settings

Use the Object Settings option to change some of the basic properties of the title
effect. Use the Transparency slider to set the desired opacity of the title text, or the
Scale slider to change its size.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize each of the object settings. See
Utilizing Title Effect Keyframes for more information.

You can use the X and Y Position fields to set the precise location of the top left
corner of the title effect on the video image. To rotate the title effect, enter an angle
degree in the Rotation field and then press the Enter key on your keyboard.

Modifying 3D-Like Text Properties

If you are creating or editing a 3D-Like title template, on the text properties tab you
can modify the text size, style, color, as well as its extrusion, transparency, texture,
and rotation settings.
Note: see The Difference Between 3D and 3D-Like Effects to learn more
about both types of effects.

Applying Character Presets to 3D-Like Title Text

Select the Character Presets option to apply a defined character preset to 3D-Like
title text. After you have applied a defined character preset you can refine it using

180
 Adding Title Effects

the other properties on the tab, if required.

To apply a character preset to 3D-Like title text, ensure the text box is selected in
the preview window and then click on a character preset in the list.
Note: once you are done customizing all of the 3D-Like text properties,

click on to save the character preset to your favorites. To find and

use saved character presets, select M y Favorites in the Character types
drop-down.

Customizing Font Type Settings

Select the Font Type Settings option to set the font type and size of the selected 3D-
Like title text. You can also select the font face color, bold or italicize the text, and
set the text spacing in the text box.
If the font type you are using supports it, you can select the Kerning check box to
reduce the space between the letters in the title text.

Customizing Font Face Settings

In Font Face Settings you can customize the font extrusion and transparency
amount. To set the font color, click the colored square to open the color palette
and select the desired color of the 3D-Like title text.
Note: when applying an extrusion to the 3D-Like title text, the angle of the
extruded text changes as you move the text to different areas of the video
frame.

Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to add a reflection of the 3D-Like title text onto the
background media. Use the Distance slider to set space between the reflection and
the 3D-Like title text.

Customizing 3D Rotation Settings

Select the 3D Rotation Settings option to customize the rotation of your 3D-Like
title text. If you applied extrusion in the font face settings, use the available sliders
to rotate the 3D text to generate your preferred 3D-Like effect and orientation.

181
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Applying 3D Texture Settings

Select the 3D Texture Settings option to apply texture to the 3D-Like text by
selecting a text skin from the list. Click the Add Texture button to import your own
image. Based on the color properties of the imported image, CyberLink
PowerDirector applies a custom texture to the title text.

Enabling 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings*option to give the
3D-Like title text a 3D effect.

Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the 3D-Like title
text to have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D title text seem nearer to
the audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).

Customizing Image Settings

If your title effect contains an image, select it in the preview window, and then click
the Image Settings option to customize it.
To apply a chroma key (green screen) effect on the image, select Apply chroma key.
Next, click on and then select the color in the image that you want to replace/
make transparent. Use the Tolerance of intensity and Tolerance of hue sliders to set
the level of chroma key applied, revealing the content behind the selected image.
Select Enable flip object if you want to to flip the image in the title text upside
down or from left to right, depending on your requirement. You can also enable a
fade effect on the image. Select whether to enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the
image.
Note: when a fade is applied, note that keyframes are added to the Opacity
keyframe timeline so you can customize the length of the fade, if required.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.

182
 Adding Title Effects

Applying Motion to Title Text

Click on the title effect Motion tab to apply animations to title text, such as text
fades, text motion, or wipes.
Note: once you are done customizing the title text motion you can use the
motion blur effect to make it look smother. See Applying Motion Blur for
more information.

To apply animation to text, do this:

1. Select the title text you wish to animate in the preview window.
2. Select the Starting Effect option and then select an animation from the
available list.
3. Select the Ending Effect option and then select an animation from the
available list.

Customizing the Speed of Title Text Motion

You can modify the speed of a title text's motion and animation. The following two
factors determine the speed for the motion/animation to complete.

Duration of the Title Effect Clip in the Timeline

The longer the duration of the title effect clip in your project's timeline, the longer it
takes for the title effect animation to complete. For example, if the title effect clip is
20 seconds, it takes the title effect 20 seconds to complete the starting and ending
animation.

183
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Keyframe Timeline
A custom keyframe timeline is generated for each title effect when you open it in
the Title Designer. In the above example, because the title effect clip is 20 seconds
long on the project timeline, the keyframe timeline is also 20 seconds.

If you'd like to view the movie timeline, click the button.

The keyframe timeline lets you precisely place each keyframe, so you can time the
applied effect in your movie production. The title effect animation has four
keyframes.

The first two keyframes indicate the start and end points for the starting effect,
while the last two indicate the start and end points for the ending effect.
The darker green section indicates the time it takes for the starting/ending effect to
complete. If you would like to change the start or end time of the effect or how
long it takes for the starting or ending effect to complete, just drag a keyframe to
the desired position in the timeline.

184
 Adding Title Effects

Note: the lighter green section indicates how long the title effect displays
on screen once the starting effect animation is complete.

Applying Motion Blur

Select the Enable motion blur option if your title text has motion applied. Motion
blur makes the movement appear smoother.
Once selected, use the available sliders as follows:
Blur length: drag this slider to set the duration (number of frames) you want
blended into a single frame (the blur). Dragging the slider right will apply
more of a blur to the title text.
Blur density: drag this slider to set the number of samples (of title effect) used
per frame. Dragging the slider right will make the title text less blurry as it
adds samples to fill the missing content caused by the movement.

Utilizing Title Effect Keyframes

Use keyframes when modifying your title effects to define the start and end points
of text effects. In the Title Designer you can use keyframes to change the title
effect's transparency, size (scale), rotation, motion, and position.

Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your title effect where you want
its properties to change.

2. Click next to the text property you want to change to add a keyframe to the

185
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

corresponding keyframe track.

Note that keyframes are also added at the start and end of the keyframe track.
3. Use the features in the Title Designer to modify the properties of the title
effect as required for this keyframe. In this example we are modifying the
opacity of the title effect at the first keyframe.
When previewed, at the first keyframe the title effect is the completely
transparent, and then slowly gets more opaque until it reaches the specified
opacity level by the time the playback slider reaches the second keyframe.
It will maintain this opacity until the playback slider reaches the last keyframe,
unless you add more keyframes or change the properties of the last keyframe.
Note: you can also modify the properties of a keyframe by right clicking on
it and selecting Duplicate Previous Keyframe or Duplicate Next
Keyframe. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the
keyframe you right clicked on.
4. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes to modify the title effect's properties.

Modifying and Removing Keyframes

At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
title effect's object properties, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on
the keyframe timeline.

To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .

Saving and Sharing Title Templates

Once you finish modifying your title template you can save it to your title effects
library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with others, or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud*.

186
 Adding Title Effects

Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version

table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up

on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Title Templates for more
information.
click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the Title
Room.
click on Save to save a new template to the Title Room.

Sharing and Backing Up Title Templates

You can share your customized title templates with other CyberLink PowerDirector
users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them on
CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your title templates, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
in the Title Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.

select the title template in the library, and then click .

2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
Style: select a style or category for the template.
Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two
words as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".

187
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.

188
 Using Transitio ns

Chapter 13:

Using Transitions
Click the button to open the Transition Room to access a library of transitions
that you can use on or between image and video clips in your video production.
You can also use the available audio transitions between two audio clips on the
voice or music tracks, or on an audio track.
Transitions let you control how media appears and disappears in your project, and
changes, or transitions, from one clip to the next. You can add a transition to a
single clip, or between two clips on a track.

Adding Transitions to a Single

Clip
By adding a transition to a single clip, you can control how the clip appears and/or
disappears in your production. For example, you can add transitions to PiP video
(including images, video clips, color boards, PiP objects, paint animation objects,
title effects, and particle effects) and fully control its appearance in your final video.
Note: you can set the default behavior and duration of transitions added to
the timeline on the Editing preferences tab. See Editing Preferences for
more information.

To add a transition to a single clip, do this:

1. Click on to open the Transition Room.

2. Select a transition effect and then drag it to the beginning (prefix transition) or
ending (postfix transition) of a clip on a video track.
3. To change the duration of the transition, click on the Duration button or click
and drag its start/end points within the clip.

189
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Prefix Transition

Postfix Transition

190
 Using Transitio ns

Note: you can add transitions to all the video, image, and effect clips on the
timeline at once by clicking , choosing Apply Random Transition to
All Videos or Apply Fading Transition to All Videos, and then the
desired transition behavior. You can also do this for all the audio clips by
selecting Apply Random Audio Transition to All Audio.

Adding Transitions Between

Two Clips
You can also add a transition between two image and video clips on a video track
or between two audio clips on any of the audio related (audio, voice or music)
tracks. To add a transition between two clips, do this:

1. Click on to open the Transition Room.

2. Select a transition effect and then drag it between the two clips on a track.
3. To change the duration of the transition, click on the Duration button or click
and drag its start/end points within the clips.

191
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: you can add transitions to all the video, image, and effect clips on the
timeline at once by clicking , choosing Apply Random Transition to
All Videos or Apply Fading Transition to All Videos, and then the
desired transition behavior. You can also do this for all the audio clips by
selecting Apply Random Audio Transition to All Audio.

Using Audio Transitions

You can use audio transitions to transition between two audio files on an audio
track, or between two video clips that contain audio. Audio transitions can also be
added at the beginning or end of a single audio or video clip.
Note: when you add an audio transition between two video clips, the fade
transition is automatically added on the corresponding video track. The
video transition cannot be removed, but it can be replaced with another
video transition in the transition library.
To add an audio transition to a clip, do this:

1. Click on to open the Transition Room.

2. Select the Audio tag on the left to display the available audio transitions.
3. Select one of the transitions and then drag it to the desired position
(beginning (prefix transition), ending (postfix transition), or between two
clips).
4. To change the duration of the transition, click on the Duration button or click
and drag its start/end points within the clips.

192
 Using Transitio ns

Setting Transition Behavior

Once you have added a transition between two clips, you can set its behavior.
Transitions between two clips in CyberLink PowerDirector have one of the following
behaviors:

193
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: you can set the default behaviour of transitions added to the timeline
on the Editing preferences tab. See Editing Preferences for more
information.

Cross Transition: when using a cross transition, the two clips are side by side
on the timeline and the transition acts like a bridge between them. For
example, if you add a two second transition between two five second clips,
the total duration is 10 seconds. The transition begins at the four second mark
of the first clip, and ends at the one second mark of the second clip.

Overlap Transition: when using an overlap transition, the two clips overlap
while the transition is taking place. This allows for parts of the two clips to
play over each other during the transition. Using the same example as above,
the total duration is eight seconds, with the transition playing for two seconds
over both clips.

To set a transition's behavior, do this:

1. Click on the transition between two clips.
2. Click the Modify button to change to the other transition type, or right-click
on the transition and then select Modify Transition.
3. In the Transition Settings panel, set the behavior of the transition.

Modifying Transition Settings

Some transitions have settings you can modify in the Transition Settings panel.
These settings may include the ability to modify the background color used in the
transition, the direction of the transition effect, the type of effect used, and more.

194
 Using Transitio ns

Note: if you are modifying the settings of an alpha transition, the

Transition Designer button is available in the Transition Settings panel.
Click it to perform more advanced modifications on the alpha transition.
See Modifying Alpha Transitions in the Transition Designer for more
information.
To check if a transition you are using has adjustable settings, select it on the
timeline and then click the Modify button to open the Transition Settings panel. If
there is a setting available, adjust as required to achieve your desired results.

Note: you can also set the transition behavior in the Transition Settings
panel. See Setting Transition Behavior for more information.

Modifying Alpha Transitions in

the Transition Designer
In the Transition Designer you can modify the existing alpha transitions in the
transition library, or create new ones from scratch. Alpha transitions are wipes that
use custom images or masks to create the transition effect.

To open the Transition Designer, click on to enter the Transition Room, and
then select the Alpha transition tag on the left. Next, select an alpha transition in
the library and then click the button.

195
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

A - Alpha Tra nsition Properties, B - Tra nsition Effect Preview , C - Tra nsition Effect Keyfra m e Tim eline

To create a new alpha transition, enter the Transition Room and then click the
button to open the Transition Designer. See Creating New Alpha Transitions for
more detailed information.
Note: you can also open the Transition Designer when editing an alpha
transition's settings by clicking the Transition Designer button in the
Transition Settings panel.

Creating New Alpha Transitions

You can create new custom alpha transitions using your own imported images.
Note: when you create a new alpha transition, it is saved under the Custom
tag in the transition library, not under the Alpha tag.

196
 Using Transitio ns

To create a new alpha transition, do this:

1. Click to enter the Transition Room and then the button above the
transition library.
2. Browse to and then select the image you want to use in the alpha transition.
Once selected, click the Open button to import it into the Transition Designer.
Note: for the best results, it is recommended that you use images that
contain gradients.

3. Proceed to modify the properties of the alpha transition as required. See

Modifying Alpha Transition Properties for more detailed information.
Note: once the image is imported, it is converted to grayscale for use in the
Transition Designer.

Modifying Alpha Transition Properties

In the Properties tab of the Transition Designer you can customize the alpha
transition's properties. See the following sections for detailed information on the
properties you can modify on this tab.
Alpha Transition Overview
Changing Image Properties
Applying a Border
Customizing the Shift Progression
Setting Edge Sharpness

Alpha Transition Overview

Alpha transitions use an image's properties to perform the transition, i.e. shift from
one clip to another when used in your video production.
The image in the Transition Designer is converted to grayscale for use in the alpha
transition. By default, the areas that are blackest are the areas that are revealed
(transitioned) first, followed by the grays, and then the whitest areas. In the example
below, the center of the heart is black, so the B is revealed in that area first.

197
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: you can invert the transition area so that the whitest areas are
revealed first. See Inverting Transition Area for more information.

While the whitest outside areas are the last parts to be revealed.

Note: you can fully customize the progression of the shift (from A to B) in
the alpha transition. See Customizing the Shift Progression for more
information.

198
 Using Transitio ns

Changing Image Properties

In the Image section of the Transition Designer you can change some of the
properties for the image used in the alpha transition. If required, change the
position of the focus area in the Image preview, or the area of the image that will
be used in the alpha transition.

199
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Deselect the Keep aspect ratio option if you want more control on the shape of the
focus area. Note that the aspect ratio of the focus area matches your current
project's aspect ratio.

Select the Flip upside down option if you want to flip the image vertically, or Flip
left to right if you want to flip it horizontally.

Applying a Border
You can apply a color border on the edge of the transition line. To do this, select
the Border option and then set the level of Transparency on the border to adjust
its appearance.

200
 Using Transitio ns

Selecting Border Color

When selecting the color of the border, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired
border color.
2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors.

Customizing the Shift Progression

In this section you can customize the shift progression of the alpha transition, or
how it transitions from one clip to another when used in your video production.

Shift Progression Timeline

The shift progression timeline is a graphical representation of how the transition
progresses, i.e. how the alpha transition shifts from the A to the B as shown in the
below example.

201
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

202
Using Transitio ns

203
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

The timeline along the top is the keyframe timeline and is generated for the alpha
transition when you open it in the Transition Designer. In the below example,
because the transition duration is two seconds long (by default in the transition
library), the keyframe timeline is also two seconds. If you increased the duration of
the transition in the timeline to five seconds, the keyframe timeline would then be
five seconds long.

If alpha transition you are editing is on the timeline, click the button
to view the movie timeline.

204
 Using Transitio ns

The scale to the left represents the progression from the A to the B, and the line
shows the progress.

You can modify the shift progression as required, by changing the beginning and
ending points, or adding keyframes to precisely customize the shift progression, or
transition from one clip to another when used in your production.

Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in the transition where you want
the progression to shift.

2. Click in the Shift Progression section to add a keyframe to the progression

205
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

line.

3. If required, use the Shift slider to change the progression position of the line.

In this above example, the transition will now shift 75% from A to B in the first
second of the transition, and then progress the final 25% in the last second.
4. Repeat these steps to customize the shift progression as required using
keyframes.

Removing Keyframes
To remove a keyframe, drag the timeline slider over it so that it is highlighted and
then click .

Inverting Transition Area

Select the Invert transition area option if you want the whitest areas of the alpha
transition image to transition first, followed by the grays, and then the blackest
areas.

206
Using Transitio ns

207
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Setting Edge Sharpness

In the Edge section, use the slider to set the sharpness of the transition line by
adjusting its gradient level. Dragging it left will make it sharper,

208
 Using Transitio ns

while dragging it right will make it softer or more blurry.

Saving Alpha Transitions

Once you are finished modifying/customizing an alpha transition you can save it to
your transition library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with
others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up

on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up PiP Objects for more
information.

209
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the

Transition Room.
click on Save to save a new template to the Transition Room.
Note: when you create a new alpha transition, or edit an existing one, it is
saved under the Custom tag in the transition library, not under the Alpha
tag.

Sharing and Backing Alpha Transitions

You can share your customized alpha transitions with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized alpha transitions by
storing them on CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your alpha transitions, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
in the Transitions Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom
template, and then click OK.

select the alpha transitions in the library, and then click .

2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
Style: select a style or category for the template.
Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two
words as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".

Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.

210
 Using Transitio ns

4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.

211
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

212
 M ixing Audio and Reco rding Vo ice-Overs

Chapter 14:

Mixing Audio and

Recording Voice-Overs
Your production's audio can make or break your video production. Use the Audio
Mixing Room to mix the audio levels of your production, or record a voice-over in
the Voice-Over Room to add narration to your video.

Adjusting Audio Clip Volume

Levels
Your video production may contain audio in one of the audio tracks, the music
track, or the voice track. Since the audio may have been recorded at different levels,
the result could produce an overwhelming and confusing soundtrack.

Click to open the Audio Mixing Room to mix all of the audio levels into a more
harmonious soundtrack for your video, or mix the levels in track on each individual
clip using volume keys.

Mixing Audio In-Track

You can manually change the volume level at any point in an audio clip in the
timeline.
To change the volume level of an audio track in the timeline, click on the audio
level line at the point where you want to change the audio level to set a volume
key. Drag the volume key up to increase the volume or down to decrease the
volume.

Note: to remove a volume key, drag it outside the clip's borders.

213
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Mixing Audio in the Audio Mixing Room

Click to gain access to the audio mixer in the Audio Mixing Room, to set the
audio level for each track using the available controls.

A - Audio Tra cks in Tim eline, B - M a ster Volum e Controls, C - Fa de In/Out Controls, D - Norm a lize
Volum e, E - Audio Level M eter, F - M a ster Ga in Control
When you enter the Audio Mixing Room, the audio at the current position of the
timeline slider is available for mixing. Use the player controls to locate the position
in your video where you want to mix the audio.
To mix the audio in the timeline, do this:

214
 M ixing Audio and Reco rding Vo ice-Overs

select a clip in the timeline, and then use the master volume controls to
increase or decrease the volume at the current position.
if there is more than one audio clip on the voice or music track, or on any of
the audio tracks, click the Normalize* button to have CyberLink
PowerDirector set the volume for all the clips to the same level.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table
on our web site for detailed versioning information.

use the master gain control sliders to increase or decrease the volume of all
the media on a track.
use the audio level meter to view the audio level, or loudness in decibels,
during playback. If the audio levels rise to the red levels, you can adjust the
master volume to lower the audio level.
Note: if audio in a clip enters the red level of the audio level meter, CyberLink
PowerDirector marks the area on the timeline in red. Use the master volume
controls and audio level meter to fix the problem area as required.

Adding Fade Effects to Audio Clips

To add a fade-in/fade-out effect to an audio clip, do this:

1. Click open the Audio Mixing Room

2. Select the audio clip in the timeline.
3. Ensure the timeline slider is at the beginning of the audio clip, and then click
to add a fade-in effect.
4. Drag the timeline slider to the position in your audio clip where you want the
audio to start fading out, and then click effect.
Note: when you add fade effects, volume keys are added to the audio clip in
the timeline. You can adjust these volume keys to customize the fade effect.
See Mixing Audio In-Track for more information on adjust volume keys.

Restoring Audio Clip Volume Levels

If you are dissatisfied with the volume level of any audio clip, you can easily restore
the clip's original volume level. To do this, right-click on the audio clip and then
select Restore to Original Volume Level.

215
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Recording Voice-Overs
Click to open the Voice-Over Recording Room and record a narration with a
microphone while watching a preview of your video production.
Note: access to the Voice-Over Recording Room is only available if
CyberLink PowerDirector detects there is a microphone or other audio input
device available.

A - Recording Volum e Level, B - Recording Preferences, C- Record/Stop Button, D- Fa de-In/Out

When you capture your voice-over, the audio is placed on the voice track and is
automatically synchronized with the video. Set your recording preferences as
follows:
click Device to select your audio device and input.
click Profile to set the quality of the recorded audio.
click Preferences to set a recording time limit or three second delay before
recording begins to ensure you are ready to record. You can also set auto

216
 M ixing Audio and Reco rding Vo ice-Overs

fades.
select Mute all tracks when recording if you want CyberLink PowerDirector to
mute all the other audio while you are recording the voice over.

select fade-in the voice over, or to add a fade-out effect.

To record a voice over, do this:
1. Set the recording volume level using the available slider.

2. Click to begin recording. Record your voice over as you

watch the video in the preview window.

3. Click to stop recording. The captured voice clip is placed on

the voice track.

217
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

218
 Adding Chapters

Chapter 15:

Adding Chapters
Click the button to open the Chapter Room*. Chapters are used to ease
navigation of your finalized production if you decide to burn it to a disc. Chapters
allow viewers to watch only the content they want or easily find their place if the
disc was stopped before completion.
Note: for best results, adding chapters should be the last editing step
before burning your video production to disc. * Optional feature in
CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for
detailed versioning information.

Adding Chapters Markers

To auto add chapter markers in the Chapter Room do one of the following:
select Insert chapter at the start of each clip on the first video track to add a
chapter marker before each clip on the top track in the timeline.
select Insert chapters at fixed intervals, and then enter the interval (in minutes)
in the field provided.
select Insert chapters evenly and then enter the number of chapters in the
field provided, to set a specified number of chapters evenly in your project.
Click the Start button to auto add the chapter markers as specified.

To set chapter markers manually, navigate to a point in your video production and
then click . To remove a chapter marker, select it and then click .
Click to remove all of the chapter markers in your production.

Setting Chapter Thumbnails

You can set the thumbnail image for each of your chapters, which display in the
disc menu on a finalized disc. Just drag the timeline slider to the frame in your
video production you want to use as the chapter thumbnail, and then click the

219
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

button.

220
 Adding Subtitles

Chapter 16:

Adding Subtitles
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you add subtitles to your video production, either for
a disc or imprinted on a video file. You can also import subtitles from a file, extract
them from an MKV file, or add them manually in the Subtitle Room.

To add subtitles to your video production, click on in the Subtitle Room and
then to select one of the following types of subtitles:
Create subtitles for discs/files*: select this option to create subtitles that are
compatible with most DVD/BDMV/AVCHD/MKV playback software and can be
switched on/off like those found on commercial discs.
Note: when you select Create subtitles for discs/files, there is a Subtitles
option by default in your created disc menu in the Create Disc window. Text
formatting for disc subtitles is more limited. * Optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
Create subtitles imprinted on a video file: select this option to blend subtitles
into the video.
Note: if you are creating subtitles for an MKV file, make sure you select
the Create subtitles for disc/files option, not the option where the
subtitles are imprinted on the video file.

Adding Subtitle Markers

Subtitle markers are the placeholders for the subtitle text added to your production.
They are added to display at the exact time the dialogue is spoken in the video
production, and display until it has completed. Unless you are importing subtitles
from an SRT file or extracting them from an MKV file, you must add all the subtitle
markers manually to your video production.
To manually add subtitle markers to your video production, you can:

click the play button on the player controls and then click the button
at the beginning of every piece of dialogue spoken to create all the subtitle
markers required for your production. Continue this process until the video is
complete, and then click the stop button to load the subtitle markers into the

221
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Subtitle Room.
use the player controls to find the position in the video where you want to
add the subtitle, and then click the button to add a single subtitle
marker.
Once you have added the subtitle markers, the next step is to edit the subtitle text
and duration. See Editing Subtitles for more information.

Importing Subtitles from a File

Click the button in the Subtitle Room to import subtitles from a file* in the
SRT or TXT formats. This allows you to compose subtitles outside the program or
retrieve them from another source, and then import them into CyberLink
PowerDirector.
Note: when an SRT file is imported, the subtitle markers are created
automatically in the Subtitle Room. However for TXT files you must first add
all of the subtitle markers before you can import the file. See Adding
Subtitle Markers fore more information.
If importing from a TXT file, you should ensure the subtitle markers in the Subtitle
Room match the number of lines of subtitle text in the file. When composing the
subtitles in a TXT file, each subtitle should be placed on a new line in the file.
CyberLink PowerDirector detects each line, and then imports the corresponding
text into the subtitles markers in the Subtitle Room.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Extracting Subtitles from an

MKV File
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you extract the subtitles from an MKV file, importing
them directly into the Subtitles Room. This allows you to manually edit the
subtitles, and then re-produce the file with the updated subtitle text.
To extract subtitles from an MKV file, do this:
1. Import the MKV file into the media library, and then place the video file on the

222
 Adding Subtitles

timeline.
2. Right-click on the file, select Extract Subtitles, and then the language of the
subtitles you want to extract.
3. CyberLink PowerDirector will extract the subtitles into the Subtitle Room.
Once you have extracted the subtitles from the file, you can then edit the subtitle
text. See Editing Subtitles for more information.

Editing Subtitles
Once the subtitle markers are added in the Subtitle Room, you can perform a
variety of edits on them, including editing subtitle text, changing the subtitle text
font, positioning them on the screen, and more.
To edit the subtitles in your video production, do this:

double-click on each subtitle marker in the timeline (or in the Subtitle Text
column), and then enter the text as required.

click the button to set the position of the subtitles on the screen. Use
the X position slider to set its position on the horizontal, use the Y position
slider to set its vertical position.

click the button to format the subtitle text as required. If you are
creating a 3D video production, use the 3D Depth* slider to set the amount of
depth you want the subtitles to have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make
the 3D subtitles seem nearer to the audience (in the foreground), while
dragging it right will make them appear farther away (in the background).

Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

to remove a subtitle marker, select it and then click the button.

Note: once you are done editing the subtitles, you can click the
button to export and save them as an SRT file.

223
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Syncing Subtitles
To ensure the subtitles in your video production sync with the video dialogue, you
can manually adjust the start and end time for each subtitle marker, or the duration
they display on screen.
To set a start time for a subtitle marker, do either of the following:
double click on the Start Time column for the subtitle marker, and then enter
a time code.
position your cursor at the beginning of the subtitle marker on the subtitle
track, and then drag it to the new position.
To set an end time for a subtitle, do either of the following:

double click on the End Time column for the subtitle marker, and then enter a
time code.
position your cursor at the end of the subtitle marker on the subtitle track,
and then drag it to the new position.
You can also easily set the duration of each subtitle marker by selecting it on the
subtitle track and then clicking the Duration button above the timeline. In the
Duration Settings window, enter in the how long you want it to display, and then
click on OK.

224
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Chapter 17:

Producing Your Project

When you are done editing your project, it's time to produce it. Producing simply
means compiling (or rendering) the separate elements your project contains into a
playable file. As your production may be destined for many different uses,
CyberLink PowerDirector has several options suited for all your requirements. You
can even produce just your project's audio into a music file, creating your own
production soundtrack in one easy step.

Utilizing Intelligent SVRT

Intelligent SVRT* (Smart Video Rendering Technology) is a proprietary rendering
technology from CyberLink that assists in the output of your video productions by
suggesting which video profile you should use.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table
on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Based on the format of original video clips in your project, what portions of the
clips were modified (and therefore require rendering during production), and which
portions of them were not changed (and thus can be skipped over during the
rendering process), Intelligent SVRT suggests the video profile that will result in the
best output quality possible, and save you the most time during production.
To utilize Intelligent SVRT, do one of the following:
when editing your video production in the Edit window, right-click on the
timeline and select Show SVRT Track.
in the Produce window, click the Intelligent SVRT button on the Standard 2D
or 3D tab.
In the Intelligent SVRT dialog that displays, CyberLink PowerDirector auto selects
the video profile it suggests you use to output your video production, and some
other video profiles you can utilize.
Note: view the SVRT information in the Edit window for more detailed
information, including which video clips need rendering. If you viewing the
SVRT information in the Produce window, click the Details (Edit) button to
quickly switch to the Edit window.

225
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

To select a video profile, just select it in the Intelligent SVRT dialog and then click
Apply when you are in the Produce window. The selected video profile is auto
highlighted and selected as you proceed to produce. The video profile you used is
also saved in the dialog, and will always be available when utilizing Intelligent SVRT.

Produce Window
Click the Produce button to compile your video production into a file that is ready
for a variety of uses, including sharing with others, uploading to the Internet, or for
burning to disc at a later date.

A - Output in a Sta nda rd 2D Form a t, B - Output in a 3D Form a t, C - Output to a Device, D - Production

Profiles (Video/Audio File Form a ts), E - Uploa d to Online Web Site, F - Production Preview , G -
Production Deta ils, H - Profile Settings, I - Production Preferences

226
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Note: before producing a movie production, make sure that all of your video
clips have the same interlacing format. This is an extremely important step
to take before production, as it can drastically affect final video quality. If
you produce your movie and find the video quality unsatisfactory, verify if the
interlacing format of all of your video clips is the same. If your clips have
different interlacing formats, set them all to the same format, then produce
your movie again. For more information, see Setting TV (Video Clip
Interlacing) Format.
In the produce window, select the production option that matches the task you
want to perform. You can select one of the following production options:

Tab Description
Standard 2D Click on the Standard 2D tab if you want to output
your production to a 2D video file that you can
watch on a computer or burn to a disc at a later
date. You can also output just the audio into a
audio file for playback on a variety of devices. See
Outputting to a Standard 2D File for more
information.
3D Click on the 3D tab if you want to output your
production in a 3D video file format. See
Outputting in a 3D Format for more information.
Device Click on the Device tab if you want to produce
your video and then output it to a camcorder or
portable device. See Outputting to a Device for
more information.
Online Click on the Online tab if you want to upload your
video to YouTube, Facebook, Dailymotion, or
Vimeo. See Uploading Video to Social Web Sites for
more information.
Note: you can also produce multiple created video production projects at
one time in the Edit window using the Batch Produce feature. See Batch
Produce for more information.

227
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Outputting to a Standard 2D File

You can output your video production as a standard 2D video file, which you can
watch on a computer, burn to disc, or output to a portable device. You can also
output just the audio into a audio file format for playback.
Note: if you're not sure which video file format you should output your
production in, click the Intelligent SVRT button for assistance. See Utilizing
Intelligent SVRT for more information on using this feature.

You can output your project to one of the following formats:

AVI
MPEG-2*
Windows Media
QuickTime*
H.264 AVC*
H.265 HEVC*
XAVC S*
Audio file
To output your video production in standard 2D, do this:
Note: if there is any 3D media in your video production, you must ensure the
file's 3D source format is set prior to production to ensure the media displays
properly in 2D. CyberLink PowerDirector will incorporate the specified eye
frames into your 2D video. See Setting 3D Source Format for more
information.
1. Select a video file format by clicking it (or the audio file option if you just
want to output your production's audio).
Note: if you select the H.265 HEVC or H.264 AVC output format, you must
also select the container from the drop-down. You can choose from the .
M2TS, .MKV, or .MP4 container file format. If you want to output to an audio
file, select the audio file format in the drop-down that displays. You can
output in the WMA, WAV, or M4A file format.
2. Select the Profile name/Quality you want to use to create the file. This
selection determines the video resolution, file size, and overall quality of the
outputted file. See Customizing Profiles for more information.

228
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Note: in some versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, the H.265 HEVC, H.264

AVC, and WMV video file formats support up to 4K* resolution (Ultra HD).
Before production, be sure to select the desired video resolution in the
Profile name/Quality drop-down. * optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
3. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
4. Check the production details and that the file will be outputted to the folder

on your computer where you want it. Click to set another output
folder.
5. Click the Start button to begin producing your file.

Customizing Profiles
After you select a file format for your outputted file, depending on the format you
selected, there may be quality settings you can customize in the profiles section.
These quality settings are called profiles, and can consist of a video file's resolution,
bitrate compression, audio compression type, and more.
Before you output your production, you may want to create a new quality profile,
edit an existing one, or select a different profile and other options from one of the
available drop-downs in the production options section.

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing your file, you can select from the following production
options:
Note: the options that are available depend on the file format you selected
and the version of CyberLink PowerDirector that is installed on your
computer.

Fast video rendering technology: SVRT and Hardware video encoder are
options that can reduce production time. The Hardware video encoder
option is only enabled if your computer supports hardware acceleration
(NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card that
supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel Core

229
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Processor Family technology), and you are outputting in a file format that
supports it (H.264 and MPEG-4).
Dolby Digital 5.1: select this preference if you want to include Dolby Digital
5.1 audio in your produced video file.
x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color range than
usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-compliant stream,
which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while offering the
opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback environment is x.
v.Color ready.
Upload a copy to CyberLink Cloud*: if you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription, select this option if you also want the program to upload the
produced file to your CyberLink Cloud storage space after production.
Note: if you selected to upload a copy of the produced file to CyberLink
Cloud, PowerDirector will ask you if you want to convert it before uploading.
Click Yes to convert it to an .MP4 file that is playable on a portable device,
or No if you want to upload the original produced file.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Outputting in a 3D Format
You can output your production in a 3D* video file format. To output your project
to a file, select the 3D tab and then select the desired file format.
Note: if you're not sure which video file format you should output your
production in, click the Intelligent SVRT button for assistance. See
Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for more information on using this feature. *
Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on
our web site for detailed versioning information.
You can output your production to one of the following file formats:
Windows Media
MPEG-2*
QuickTime*

230
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

H.264 AVC*
To output your video production in 3D, do this:
Note: if there is any 2D media in your video production, you must convert it
to 3D before production. See Power Tools: 2D to 3D for more information.

1. Select a 3D video file format by clicking it.

Note: if you select the H.264 AVC output format, you must also select the
container from the drop-down. You can choose from the .M2TS, .MKV, or .
MP4 container file format.

2. Select the 3D output format from the drop-down. See 3D Output Formats for
more information.
3. Select the Profile name/Quality you want to use to create the file. This
selection determines the video resolution, file size, and overall quality of the
outputted file. See Customizing Profiles for more information.
Note: in some versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, the H.264 AVC/WMV
video file formats support up to 4K* resolution (Ultra HD). Before
production, be sure to select the desired video resolution in the Profile
name/Quality drop-down. * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
Check the version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
4. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
5. Check the production details and that the file will be outputted to the folder

on your computer where you want it. Click to set another output
folder.
6. Click the Start button to begin producing your file.

3D Output Formats
Once you select a video file format (or container), you need to select the 3D output
source format. This selection specifies how the 3D content is displayed. You can
select one of the following 3D output source formats:
Side-by-Side Half Width (L/R): a side-by-side 3D source format optimized for
4:3 or non-HD video productions.
Side-by-Side Full Width (L/R): a side-by-side 3D source format optimized for

231
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

HD video productions.*
Note: * 3D MPEG-2 videos cannot be outputted with this source format. The
side-by-side full width format is only available when the Ultra version of
CyberLink PowerDirector is installed on a 64-bit operating system.

H.264 Multi-View Coding: a Multi-View Coding (MVC) source format.

Anaglyph: a red/cyan source format. Select this format if you do not have a
3D display device, to watch a 3D video production with anaglyphic 3D glasses.

Customizing Profiles
After you select a file format for your outputted file, depending on the format you
selected, there may be quality settings you can customize in the profiles section.
These quality settings are called profiles, and can consist of a video file's resolution,
bitrate compression, audio compression type, and more.
Before you output your production, you may want to create a new quality profile,
edit an existing one, or select a different profile and other options from one of the
available drop-downs in the production options section.

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing your file, you can select from the following production
options:
Note: the options that are available depend on the file format you selected
and the version of CyberLink PowerDirector that is installed on your
computer.

Fast video rendering technology: SVRT and Hardware video encoder are
options that can reduce production time. The Hardware video encoder
option is only enabled if your computer supports hardware acceleration
(NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card that
supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel Core
Processor Family technology), and you are outputting in a file format that
supports it (H.264 and MPEG-4).
Dolby Digital 5.1: select this preference if you want to include Dolby Digital
5.1 audio in your produced video file.

232
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color range than
usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-compliant stream,
which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while offering the
opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback environment is x.
v.Color ready.
Upload a copy to CyberLink Cloud*: if you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription, select this option if you also want the program to upload the
produced file to your CyberLink Cloud* storage space after production.
Note: if you selected to upload a copy of the produced file to CyberLink
Cloud, PowerDirector will ask you if you want to convert it before uploading.
Click Yes to convert it to an .MP4 file that is playable on a portable device,
or No if you want to upload the original produced file.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Outputting to a Device
Select the Device tab if you want to output your video production back to a DV or
an HDV* tape.
Note: you must manually locate the position on your HDV camcorder tape
where you want to write back your content to before proceeding.

You can also output your production to a file that you can then copy back to an
HDD (hard disk drive) camcorder*. Or output it in a file format that is compatible
with a number of portable devices, including for an iPod/iPhone/iPad, PS3*/PSP/
Walkman, Xbox/Zune, and a wide variety of mobile phones*.
To output your video production to a device, do this:
Note: if there is any 2D media in your video production, you must convert it
to 3D before production. See PowerTools: 2D to 3D for more information.

1. Select a device type by clicking it. If you are writing back to a DV or HDV
camcorder, ensure it is connected and turned on.
2. Select the Profile Type or Profile name/Quality you want to use to create the

233
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

file. This selection determines the video resolution, file size, and overall quality
of the outputted file. See Customizing Profiles for more information.
3. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
4. Check the production details and that the file will be outputted to the folder

on your computer where you want it. Click to set another output
folder.
5. Click the Start button to begin producing your file.

Customizing Profiles
After you select the format of your produced project file, depending on your
selection, there may be video quality settings you can customize in the video
profiles section.
These video quality settings are called profiles, and can consist of your video's
resolution, bitrate compression, audio compression type, and more.
Before you output your production, you may want to create a new quality profile,
edit an existing one, or select a different profile and other options from one of the
available drop-downs in the production options section.

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing, you can select from the following production options:
Note: the preferences that are available depend on the file format you
selected and the version of CyberLink PowerDirector that is installed on
your computer.

Fast video rendering technology: SVRT and Hardware video encoder are
options that can reduce production time (available for creating an HDD
camcorder file only). The Hardware video encoder option is only enabled if
your computer supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that
supports CUDA technology, an AMD graphics card that supports AMD
Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel Core Processor
Family technology), and you are outputting in a file format that supports it
(H.264 and MPEG-4).

234
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Dolby Digital 5.1: select this preference if you want to include Dolby Digital
5.1 audio in your produced video file (available for creating an HDD
camcorder file only).
x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a new color system that can display a wider color range
than usual (available for creating an HDD camcorder file only). CyberLink
PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-compliant stream, which is
backward compatible with RGB displays, while offering the opportunity to
achieve better visual quality if your playback environment is x.v.Color ready.
Upload a copy to CyberLink Cloud*: if you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription, select this option if you also want the program to upload the
produced file to your CyberLink Cloud* storage space after production.
Note: if you selected to upload a copy of the produced file to CyberLink
Cloud, PowerDirector will ask you if you want to convert it before uploading.
Click Yes to convert it to an .MP4 file that is playable on a portable device,
or No if you want to upload the original produced file.
Delete the file after the write back is complete: select this option to have
CyberLink PowerDirector delete the produced video file after it has written it
back to your DV or HDV camcorder.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Uploading Video to Online Media Sites

Click on the Online tab to upload your video production to one of the following
online media web sites:
Facebook
YouTube
Dailymotion
Vimeo
Niconico Douga
Youku

235
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: in some versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, you can produce and

upload up to 4K* resolution (Ultra HD) video to social web sites. Before
production, be sure to select the desired video resolution in the Profile
name/Quality drop-down.

Uploading Video to Facebook

To upload your video to Facebook®, do this:
1. Click the Facebook button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down list.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Facebook once uploaded.
4. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
5. Click Start to begin.
6. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Facebook account by following the steps in the Facebook
Authorization windows.
7. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing, you can select from the following production options:
Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that

will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output

236
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

folder or change the name of the produced file.

Uploading Video to YouTube

To upload your video to YouTube, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on YouTube.
1. Click the YouTube Videos button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on YouTube.
Note: the quality option available on YouTube is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on YouTube once uploaded. Also select one of the
Video categories and enter in some keyword Tags that users can search for to
find your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
YouTube.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your YouTube account by following the steps in the YouTube
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.

237
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Uploading to YouTube 3D
If the video production you are uploading is a 3D production, select the Share as a
3D video* option to upload it to YouTube in a 3D video source format. Once
uploaded, you will be able to watch it on YouTube in 3D.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing, you can select the following production preference:
Hardware video encoding: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that

will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output

folder or change the name of the produced file.

Uploading Video to Dailymotion

To upload your video to Dailymotion, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Dailymotion.
1. Click the Dailymotion button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Dailymotion.

238
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Note: the quality option available on Dailymotion is also dependent on the

original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Dailymotion once uploaded. Also select one of the
Video categories and enter in some keyword Tags that users can search for to
find your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Dailymotion.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Dailymotion account by following the steps in the Dailymotion
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that

will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output

239
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

folder or change the name of the produced file.

Uploading Video to Vimeo

To upload your video to Vimeo, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Vimeo.
1. Click the Vimeo button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Vimeo.
Note: the quality option available on Vimeo is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Vimeo once uploaded. Also enter in some keyword
Tags that users can search for to find your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Vimeo.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Vimeo account by following the steps in the Vimeo
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.

240
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that

will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output

folder or change the name of the produced file.

Uploading Video to Niconico Douga

To upload your video to Niconico Douga, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Niconico Douga.
1. Click the Niconico Douga button.
2. Enter your Niconico Douga Username and Password. If you don't have an
account, click the Sign Up to Niconico link to get one.
3. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Niconico Douga.
Note: the quality option available on Niconico Douga is also dependent on
the original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
4. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Niconico Douga once uploaded. Also enter in some
keyword Tags that users can search for to find your video.

241
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

5. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Niconico Douga.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
6. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
7. Use the player controls in the preview window to find the frame of video in
your production you want to use as the video's thumbnail on the Niconico
Douga web site, and then click the Set Thumbnail button.
8. Click Start to begin.
9. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Niconico Douga account by following the steps in the
Niconico Douga Authorization windows.
10. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that

will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output

folder or change the name of the produced file.

242
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Uploading Video to Youku

To upload your video to Youku, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Youku.
1. Click the Youku button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Youku.
Note: the quality option available on Youku is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Youku once uploaded. Also select one of the Video
categories and enter in some keyword Tags that users can search for to find
your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Dailymotion.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Youku account by following the steps in the Youku
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.

243
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Configuring Production Options

Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that

will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output

folder or change the name of the produced file.

Batch Produce
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you produce multiple projects an once using the
Batch Produce feature. In the Batch Produce window, you can import multiple
CyberLink PowerDirector projects in the .pds format and output them as video files
in a variety of formats all in one sitting.
To perform a batch production, do this:
Note: if you are currently working on a video production, you must save and
close it before you can perform a batch production.

1. Select File > Batch Produce from the menu.

2. Click , and then browse to and select the CyberLink PowerDirector

project you want to add to the production queue.
3. If required, click on the file name in the Outputted File Name column to
change the name of the outputted video file.

4. If required, click on to edit the task's production profile settings as

follows:

244
 Pro ducing Yo ur Pro ject

Note: if required, click on the Intelligent SVRT button for assistance on

selecting an output profile. See Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for more
information.

Output folder: if required, select another location on your computer where

the file will be outputted to by clicking to set another output folder.

Production type: select whether you want to output the selected task as a
video file, video file for a device, or a 3D* video file.
Media file format: select the format of the outputted video file from this drop-
down.
Note: based on your first two selections, the available drop-downs that
follow will differ. Use them to select 3D* output format, profile, etc.

Click OK to close the Profile Settings window and set your changes.
5. If your computer supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card
that supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated
Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel Core Processor Family
technology) and you are outputting in a file format that supports it (H.264 and
MPEG-4), select the Enable GPU hardware video encoder
automatically option if you want C yberLink PowerDirector to use it,
when available, during the batch production.
6. Click Start to begin the production of all the tasks in the list.
Note: select the Shut down computer after production option to have
CyberLink PowerDirector shut down the program and your computer once
all the tasks are produced.

245
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

246
 Creating Discs

Chapter 18:

Creating Discs
After you finish creating your video production, click on Create Disc to burn your
movie onto a disc, complete with a disc menu. You can also import additional
videos and CyberLink PowerDirector projects, creating multi-layered professional
looking disc in just a few simple steps.

A - Disc Content Ta b, B - M enu Preferences Ta b, C - 2D Disc Preferences Ta b, D - 3D Disc Preferences

Ta b, E - Disc M enu Font Properties, F - Disc M enu Preview Window , G - Set Buttons Per Pa ge, H - Burn
to Disc, I - Preview Disc M enu, J - Disc M enu Properties, K - M enu Na viga tion Controls, L - Disc
Content
Discs created in CyberLink PowerDirector can have one or more titles (video files or
CyberLink PowerDirector projects), which are called Scenes on the final disc. Each
title (or Scene) can have multiple chapters and include subtitles.
To create a disc menu and then burn your video production to disc, do this:
1. Click on the Create Disc button to open the Create Disc window. The video

247
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

production you were working on is automatically imported into the window.

2. On the Content tab, click the and buttons to import

additional titles (video files and/or PowerDirector projects) onto your disc. See
Importing Additional Disc Content for more detailed information.
3. Click on the Menu Preferences tab and then select the menu in the library that
you want to use on your disc. See Selecting a Disc Menu for more detailed
information on selecting disc menus, or for information on customizing your
own.
4. Edit the selected disc menu's properties, including customizing menu text,
the number of buttons, background music, and more. See Editing Disc Menu
Properties for more information.
5. If required, right-click on your selected disc menu's thumbnail in the library
and select Modify to perform advanced editing on it in the Menu Designer.
You can also create new disc menus and 3D* menus in the Menu Designer.
See Customizing Disc Menus in the Menu Designer for more detailed
information.
6. The last step is to burn your production to disc. Do one of the following:
if your project is a standard 2D video production, click the 2D Disc tab. See
Burning a Disc in 2D for more information.
if your project is a 3D* video production, click the 3D Disc tab. See Burning a
Disc in 3D for more information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Importing Additional Disc

Content
The Content tab contains your current video production that will be burned to disc.
On this tab you can import additional titles (video files and CyberLink
PowerDirector projects), which, with your current video production, are called
Scenes on the disc menu.
On the Content tab you can add additional titles to your disc by doing the
following:

248
 Creating Discs

click on to import additional video files that you want on your

created disc.

click on to import any saved CyberLink PowerDirector projects that

you want on your created disc.
Note: as you add content, click on the M enu Structure button to view the
structure of your disc menu. In the structure tree you can see all the titles/
scenes (videos and projects) on your disc and any chapters within each
title.
While importing videos and CyberLink PowerDirector projects on to the Content
tab, use the following buttons to:

hover your mouse over the title and then click on on its thumbnail to play
back the title.

- edit the selected title in the Edit window of CyberLink PowerDirector.

- remove the selected title from the disc menu.

Click on Show Chapters to view the chapters in the selected title (video or project).
You can click the button to set/edit the selected title's chapters in the Chapters
Room. For more information on editing chapters see Adding Chapters.
Note: as you add content to your disc, note the capacity information at the

bottom of the window. Click to toggle the disc capacity display or

to view the Disc Production Summary at any time.

When you are done adding all the content you want on your disc, you can reorder
all the titles simply by dragging them to the position you want.

249
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

The order of the titles on the Content tab is the order they are burned to disc.

Selecting a Disc Menu

Click on the Menu Preferences tab to select the disc menu template in your menu
library that you want to include on your disc. To preview the pages in a disc menu,
just click on its thumbnail in the library.
Note: if you want to create a new disc menu from scratch, click the Create
M enu button at the top of the Menu Preferences tab. See Customizing Disc
Menus in the Menu Designer for more information on customizing it.

Most of the disc menu templates in CyberLink PowerDirector are multi-layered, and
can consist of the following pages:
Note: if you do not want to include a menu on your burned disc, select the
No M enu template in the menu library. When you play the burned disc, it
will automatically start playing the first title/scene.

a main menu home (Root menu) page. This is the first menu page that
displays when you play the disc. It can contain a menu opening, motion
thumbnails, and more.

250
 Creating Discs

Note: you can choose not to include a root menu on your disc. See
Configuring Disc Menu Settings for more information.

if you have more than one title (video or project), your disc will have a Scenes
page in the Disc Preview Window. Note that when in the Menu Designer, it is
called the Titles page. If you choose to not include a root menu, the scenes
page becomes the page displayed when you play the disc.
a Chapters page where you can navigate through your titles. This page is
available if you added chapters in the Chapter Room.
a Subtitles page that lets you enable/disable the subtitles on your disc.
Note: the Subtitles page in a disc menu is only available if you selected
Create subtitles for disc when creating subtitles in the Subtitle Room.
See Adding Subtitles for more information.

To select the disc menu template for your disc, do either of the following:
Note: after you select your menu template be sure to edit its properties.
You can edit the text, menu music, and more right in the disc menu preview
window on the right. See Editing Disc Menu Properties for more information.
You can also customize a disc menu's buttons, background, individual
pages, and much more in the Menu Designer. See Customizing Disc
Menus in the Menu Designer for more information.
Right-click on the menu template's thumbnail in the menu library that you
want to use and then select:
Apply to set the menu page to the current menu page you are viewing in
the disc menu preview window. For example, if you navigate to the scenes
page in the disc menu preview window and you select Apply, that menu
template is only used on the scenes page of the menu.

Apply to All Pages to apply the menu template to all the pages in your
menu, i.e. home/root, titles/scenes, chapters.

Click on a menu template thumbnail in the menu library that you want to use
and then select:
Apply to set the menu page to the current menu page you are viewing in
the disc menu preview window. For example, if you navigate to a chapters
page in the disc menu preview window and you select Apply, that menu
template is only used on the chapters page of the menu.

Apply to All Pages to apply the menu template to all the pages in your

251
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

menu, i.e. home/root, titles/scenes, chapters.

Note: if required, you can download and import additional disc menu
templates from DirectorZone. See Downloading from DirectorZone for more
information.

Editing Disc Menu Properties

CyberLink PowerDirector gives you full creative control over the look of your disc
menu. Use the menu navigation controls in the disc menu preview window to
preview the design and behavior of the selected disc menu.
If you want to view the titles/scenes, chapters, or subtitles page, click in the disc
menu preview window on the right, and then use the button and the other
menu navigation controls to navigate through the disc menu. Or click the Preview
button at the bottom of the window to view what your burned disc will look like
when played on a disc player.
Note: to perform more advanced editing on a selected disc menu template using
the Menu Designer, right-click on the menu template in the menu library and then
select M odify. See Customizing Disc Menus in the Menu Designer for more
information.

Configuring Disc Menu Settings

At the bottom of the Menu Preferences tab you can configure the disc menu
settings as follows:
Include root menu: select this option if you want a root menu or home page
on your disc. If you deselect this option, the scenes page is displayed by
default when you play the burned disc.
Include menu opening video: deselect this option if you don't want the disc
menu to include the menu opening video that is available in some disc
menus. This option is different than the first play video, which you can
include whether this item is selected or not.
Show thumbnail index: select to add numbering to each scene and chapter
thumbnail on your menu pages.
Enable motion thumbnail: deselect this option if you want to disable the
motion preview in the video title thumbnails in your disc menu.

252
 Creating Discs

Editing Disc Menu Text

To edit the menu text that appears on the menu page, including clickable button
text, double-click on it in the disc menu preview window, and then enter the new
text. You can modify menu text style, size, and alignment using the disc menu font
properties options located at the top of the disc menu window.
To change the position of any menu text on your menu, just click and drag it to the
new position.
Note: when changing menu text position in the disc menu preview window,
click to enable the TV safe zone to help with the placement of the
selected clip in the video display area.

Setting Disc Menu Music

Some of the pre-designed disc menu templates contain menu music. In the disc
menu properties area, you can:

click on to edit or replace the menu's background music. See Setting

Background Music for more information.

click to remove the current background music from the disc menu.

click to add background music with Magic Music. See Magic Music for
more information.

Setting Background Music

If you are using background music in your disc menu, click the button to
perform the following functions:
Note: the final duration of your disc menu's background music is
dependent on the time entered in the Duration field in the Playback Mode
Settings window, not the length of the music file used. See Setting Disc
Playback Mode for more information on setting your menu's duration.

click the button to add or replace the current disc menu background
music.
if required, trim the background music using the player controls and the

253
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

mark-in/mark-out indicators.

if required, set the menu music to gradually Fade-in or Fade-out.

if the length of your menu music file is not as long as the specified duration,
select the Auto repeat option to loop it.
When you are done setting the background music options, click Apply to All Pages
to set the music for all the pages in the disc menu, or Apply to set it just for the
current menu page you are viewing in the disc menu preview window.

Adding a First Play Video

Use this option to add a video (or an existing CyberLink PowerDirector project) as a
first play video to your created disc. The first play video plays automatically when
the disc is inserted into a disc player, before the disc menu loads. No navigation
buttons are available during the first play, and viewers cannot fast forward past this
segment.
In a professional production, this is usually a copyright notice or warning. However,
you may prefer to use a personal introduction or other video clip instead.
To set a video clip as the first play video, do this:

click and select the video that you want.

click to remove the video set as the first play video.

click to preview the first play video.

Note: if you are creating a 3D video production and burning it to disc in 3D,

you can use a 3D video clip as the first play video. Once added, click to
set the 3D source format of the clip. See Setting 3D Source Format for more
detailed information.

254
 Creating Discs

Setting Disc Playback Mode

Click the button open the Playback Mode Settings window and set how the
disc plays back any scenes/titles that are on your disc.
Note: disc playback mode determines how the titles/scenes (videos and
projects added on the Content tab) play back on your disc, not the
chapters contained within each title/scenes. If your disc only has one title
on it, the settings for disc playback mode have no affect on the burned disc.
In the Playback Mode Settings window you can set the following:
choose from one of the three available playback modes based on the
available descriptions. Your disc will follow the selected behavior when
inserted or play is pressed on your disc player.
Auto menu time out: select this option if you want the disc content to play
automatically when you insert the disc into a disc player. When selected, your
content plays automatically after displaying the disc menu for the specified
duration. If you do not select this option, your menu loops endlessly until you
press the play button on your disc player.
Duration: enter in the duration the content (background video, background
music, etc.) in your disc menu is displayed. The minimum duration allowed is
10 seconds, while your disc can be up to 99 seconds long before it loops back
to the beginning.
Note: the duration you enter is also the length of your menu's background
music, even if the selected music file's length is longer than the duration
specified.

Specifying Buttons Per Page

When creating a disc with multiple titles or chapters, you can select the number of
buttons that display on each of the Titles (Scenes) and Chapters menu pages.
To change the number of buttons that display on a title or chapter page, you must
first navigate to the page via the disc menu preview window. Next select the
number of Buttons per page you want on each title and chapter page from the
drop-down above the disc menu preview window. Each individual title and chapter
page can have a different number of buttons, allowing you to make each page
unique.

255
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: the maximum number of buttons that can display on each menu page
is dependent on the design of the menu template. If you want more buttons
on a page, see Adding Menu Buttons for more information.

Modifying Menu Object Properties

You can modify the properties of a disc menu's objects directly in the preview
window, in both the Create Disc module and the Menu Designer. Menu objects
include text, added images, video thumbnails, menu buttons, navigation buttons,
etc. To modify the properties of a menu object, just select it and then perform any
of the following options:

Modify Menu Object Position

Align Menu Objects

Modifying Menu Object Position

You can change the position and orientation of the title text, images, thumbnails,
buttons, etc. in the disc menu.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the precise placement of buttons, images, text, etc.
on your menu pages. Select Snap to Reference Lines to have the objects
snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and boundary of the menu area.
To modify menu object position or orientation:
click on a menu object, and then drag it to a new position.

when in the Menu Designer, click on above the selected object and then
drag it right or left to change its orientation.
when in the Menu Designer, select images and buttons, and then click and
drag a corner or side to resize them.

Aligning Menu Objects

To align menu objects in the disc menu, select the object and then the desired
alignment from the drop-down. If you just want to align the buttons, click the
button at the top of the Menu Designer window.

256
 Creating Discs

Customizing Disc Menus in the

Menu Designer
You can perform more advanced editing on your disc menu in the Menu Designer*.
You can also create a brand new disc menu template from scratch.
To edit an existing disc menu, right-click on the disc menu template in the library
on the Menu Preferences tab and then select on Modify. To create a new disc menu
template, click on the Create Menu button.

A - Cha nge M enu Text Properties Ta b, B - M enu Properties, C - Set Button Properties Ta b, D - M enu
Pa ge View (Edit pa ge), E - Add M edia /Im a ge/Text/Button, F - Set Title/Scene Button Type, G - M ode
Selection, H - Zoom Tools, I - TV Sa fe Zone/Grid Lines, J - Align Objects, K - Select Video Effect, L - Set
M enu M otion, M - Uploa d to Internet, N - Ena ble 3D Depth

257
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version

table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

In the Menu Designer you can edit all three possible disc menu pages. Note that the
titles/scenes (videos and projects on your disc) and chapters pages always have the
same layout.
To modify a specific page, select Root Menu, Titles/Chapters Menu, or Subtitles
Menu from the Edit page drop-down menu.
Note: the subtitles menu page is only available if you selected Create
subtitles for disc when you added subtitles in the Subtitle Room. See
Adding Subtitles for more information.

Mode Selection, Zoom Tools, and Context

Menu
When customizing menus in the Menu Designer use the mode selection, zoom
tools, and context menu for assistance.
Note: when modifying menus in the Menu Designer, use the player controls to
preview, and click to preview the menu at full screen.

Mode Selection
In the Menu Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to
enable object selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the menu
text, buttons, images, etc. to different areas of the menu.

Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the Menu
Designer. This mode is especially helpful if zoomed in on the disc menu.

Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying the disc menu. You can also select the viewer zoom amount from
the drop-down to set the size of the disc menu preview. Select Fit to resize the disc

258
 Creating Discs

menu so that is fits in the Menu Designer's viewer window.

Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the disc menu.

Context Menu
When in the Menu Designer, you can right-click on an item in the preview window
to gain access to some functionality you may find useful.
In the context menu you can:

insert images, title text, and buttons onto the menu page.
cut, copy, paste, or delete items on the menu page.
bring the selected item forward, or send it backward.
quickly align selected items in the menu page how you want them.
select Align All Menu Buttons to uniformly align all of the menu buttons on
the current menu page.
go to Full Screen View for a larger view of the current menu page.

Setting Menu Opening and Background

You can import a video that plays in the background while the menu is loading.
Usually called a menu opening, it is seen on most commercial discs before the
menu options display.
You can also add or replace the background of your disc menu with an image or a
video file, or set a video effect that is applied to the background of your disc menu.

Including a Menu Opening

To include a video as the menu opening, click the button, select the Import
User Video For Menu Opening option, and then the video you want to use.
Note: the Include menu opening video option on the Menu Preferences
tab must be selected for this feature to work when burned to disc.

259
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Setting Menu Background

To set or replace the background image of your menu, with either an image or a
video file. To do this, click the button and then select the Set Background
Image or Video option. Once selected, set how the background media is displayed
in the Background Media Adjustment Settings window.
Note: to remove the imported background image or video, just click the

button.

Adjusting Menu Background's Media Settings

When you import video clips and images to use as a background for your disc
menu, the Background Media Adjustment Settings window displays. In the window
you can set the following:
Stretch Setting: on this tab, select what you want CyberLink PowerDirector to
do if the video clip or image you selected as the background has a different
aspect ratio than your disc menu template. Select Apply to all menu pages to
use this setting on all menu pages.
Set Source Format: if you are outputting a 3D video production as a 3D-BD*
disc, click on this tab to set the 3D source format of the background video
you imported. See Setting 3D Source Format for more detailed information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Adding Motion to Background Images

If you imported an image to use as the menu's background, you can select a
motion effect to make your menu more engaging. To do this, select from the
available motion options in the drop-down below the preview window.

260
 Creating Discs

Selecting a Video Effect Background

To apply a video effect to your disc menu's background, click on the button at
the bottom of the designer window, and then select the video effect from the list.
Use any available settings to customize the effect to your liking.

Adding Images to Menus

Click the button to import an image onto your disc menu. Once imported,
you can reposition and resize the image to fit your disc menu as required. If you
want to add an image as the menu's background, see Setting Menu Background.
See Customizing Image Settings if you would like to use chroma key to make the
image in the disc menu transparent. To adjust the fade effect on the imported
image, see Applying Fades to Images.

Adding and Editing Disc Menu Title Text

You can add additional title text to a disc menu, or completely customize the
format and alignment on the existing title text in the Menu Designer.
Note: you cannot edit the title text content in Menu Designer window. You
must edit this title text in the disc menu preview window. See Editing Disc
Menu Title Text for more information.

Adding Text to Disc Menus

To add additional text to your disc menu, do this:

261
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

1. Click the button.

2. Type in the text you want to use.

Changing Menu Text Properties

Click on the tab to change the properties of the menu text in your disc
menu. You can also change the properties of any images that were added to the
disc menu.

Applying Preset Character Types

Select the Character Presets option to apply a defined character preset to a text
object. After you have applied a defined character preset you can refine it using the
other properties on the tab, if required.
To apply a character preset to a text object, ensure the text box is selected in the
preview window and then click on a character preset in the list.
Note: once you are done customizing all of the text properties on the tab,

click on to save the character preset to your favorites. To find and

use saved character presets, select M y Favorites in the Character types
drop-down.

Customizing Font Type

Select the Font Type option to set the font type and size of the selected text object.
You can also select the font face color, bold or italicize text, change the line and
text spacing, and set the text alignment in the text box.
If the font type you are using supports it, you can select the Kerning check box to
reduce the space between the letters in the text.

262
 Creating Discs

Customizing Font Face

In Font Face you can customize the font color, blur, and transparency. Select to
enable the font face properties on the selected text object, and then use the Blur
and Transparency sliders to customize its appearance.
When customizing the font face color, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
Uniform color: select this option if you want the font to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired font
color.
2 color gradient: select this option if you want the font color to change from
one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set the
beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction control to
set which way the color flows.
4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the font to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the text.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Applying Font Shadow

Select the Font Shadow option to add a shadow to the text object. Available
options allow you to change the shadow's color, direction, distance from the text,
and add a transparency or blur effect.

Applying Border
Select the Border option to add a border around the text object. Available options
allow you to change the border's size, and add a transparency or blur effect.
You can customize the border color using the following options in the Fill type
drop-down:
Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired

263
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

border color.
2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction
control to set which way the color flows.
4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the border to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the border.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table
on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Enable 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings* option to give the
text object a 3D effect.

Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the text object to
have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D text object seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).

Customizing Image Settings

If your disc menu contains an imported image, select it in the preview window,
click the Image Settings option, and then select Apply chroma key to add a chroma
key (green screen) effect to it.

Click on and then select the color in the image that you want to replace/make
transparent. Adjust the Tolerance of hue, Tolerance of saturation, and Tolerance of
luminance sliders to remove the selected color/background. Adjust until the menu
background is completely revealed, without any loss of quality on the added image
. Use the Edge sharpness slider to fine tune the edges of the image on the revealed
background. Using this slider can make the image look more authentic by

264
 Creating Discs

sharpening the edges.

Select the Maintain image's aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the image's
aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing it. Deselect this
option if you want to change the image's shape or alter its aspect ratio.

Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to add a reflection of the text object onto the
background media. Use the Distance slider to set space between the reflection and
the text object. Use the Transparency slider to set the opacity of the reflection.

Applying Fades to Images

If your disc menu contains an imported image, select it and then the Fades option
to apply a fade effect on it. Select whether to enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on
the image.
You can adjust the fades by clicking and dragging the keyframes below the preview
window.

265
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

The section in blue is how long the image displays, while the orange parts are the
fade in and out. If you don't want the image to fade in and out, just drag the
keyframes to either end, so only the blue displays.

266
 Creating Discs

Adding and Editing Menu Buttons

You can add additional menu text buttons to your disc menu. You can also set the
properties for all of the menu and navigation buttons used in the menu.

Setting the Title/Scene Menu Button Type

You can set which type of title/scene menu buttons are used in the disc menu.
From the menu button type drop-down, select one of the following types:
Text Only: select this type if you only want clickable text displayed in your
disc menu.
Thumbnails & Text: select this type if you want each title/scene to display
both a clickable video thumbnail and text.
Single Thumbnail: select this type to only display a video thumbnail for the
first title/scene on the page, which is not clickable. All the titles/scenes will
have clickable text on the menu page.

267
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Adding Menu Buttons

Menu buttons are the buttons that provide access to your disc's content, chapters,
and subtitles. They may consist of just text or text and an accompanying
thumbnail, depending on the menu button type set above and the design of the
disc menu template.
Note: you can add up to 14 menu buttons on each menu page.

To add a menu button, click the button. Depending on the page in your disc
menu you add the button to, the new button might just be text or button text and
a scene/chapter thumbnail.

Note: click the button at the top of the Menu Designer to align all of
the current menu buttons in the disc menu window. If you want all newly

added menu button to auto align, click next to this button and then
select Auto Align Buttons > On.

Setting Button Properties

Click on the tab and to set the properties of all the buttons in your disc
menu. You can customize the button frame, layout, highlight style, and more.
Note: the menu button properties that are available depend on which menu
page you are currently editing.

Changing Navigation Buttons

To change the navigation buttons that are used in your disc menu, select the
Navigation Buttons option. Select a set of navigation button (each set contains four
navigation buttons) from the list, or click on Import Custom if you want to use your
own buttons you custom created. If you imported custom buttons, or modified an
existing set, click the Save as button to save the current buttons as a new set of
navigations buttons.

268
 Creating Discs

Setting Button Highlight Style

Select the Button Highlight Style option to set the highlight icon used on a menu
button thumbnail for scenes and chapter buttons. Click on Import Custom if you
want to use your own custom highlight icon.
If your disc menu is using text buttons, select the Enable text highlight option if you
want it to be highlighted on the menu when it is active on the screen. Select
Highlight color and then click the colored square to open the color palette to select
the desired highlight color used.

Enabling 3D Depth in Disc Menus

If you are creating a 3D video production and want your disc menu to be in 3D,
click the button and then select the desired 3D format from the drop-down.

Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Saving and Sharing Disc Menu

Templates
Once you are finished modifying/customizing a disc menu template you can save
it in your disc menu library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with
others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up

on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Disc Menu Templates for
more information.
click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the disc
menu library.
click on Save to save a new template to the disc menu library.

269
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Sharing and Backing Up Disc Menu

Templates
You can share your customized disc menu templates with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them
on CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your disc menu templates, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
in the Menu Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.

select the disc menu template in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
Style: select a style or category for the template.
Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two
words as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".

Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.

270
 Creating Discs

Burning Your Production to Disc

Burning your video production to disc is the final stage of the create disc process.
Once your disc is burned, you are able to play it on a disc player. You can also
create a disc folder to organize your media files on your hard drive. When finalizing
your disc, you have the choice of:
Burning a Disc in 2D
Burning a Disc in 3D
In CyberLink PowerDirector you can burn your video production to one of the
following optical disc formats:
DVD: DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW
VCD*/SVCD (2D discs only): CD-R, CD-RW
Blu-ray Disc(TM)*: BDXL, BD-RE, BD-R
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Burning a Disc in 2D
If you created a standard 2D video production, click on the 2D Disc tab to configure
your disc's preferences and burn it to disc.

Configuring Disc Preferences

The following preferences are available on the 2D Disc tab:
Disc Format
select the disc format type you want to use to burn your video to a disc.
Depending on the disc format type that you select, there may be a drop-down
option to select the capacity of the disc.
Video and Audio Settings
Select the video recording format: if available for your selected disc format,
select the recording format of the video on your disc and its aspect ratio.

271
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Select the video encoding format and quality: if available for your selected
disc format, select a video encoding format and video quality for your disc
from the drop-downs. For quality, select the Smart Fit option if you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to automatically adjust the bitrate to create the best
quality video file possible, which will fit the capacity of the disc you are using.
Select the audio encoding format and channels: select an audio format for
your disc, and the number of channels it is capable of outputting to. If
burning a DVD, Blu-ray Disc, or AVCHD disc, you can select Dolby Digital to
create a disc with Dolby Digital 2 or 5.1 surround sound. If burning a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc, you can also select DTS to have CyberLink PowerDirector use the
DTS 5.1 Producer to create a disc with DTS 5.1 surround sound.
Note: the video quality and audio type options that are available depend on
the disc format that you have selected.

Enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround: if available, select this option to

enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround to enhance the menu background
music. Choose from Living Room, Theater, or Stadium.

Burning the Disc

To burn your video production and created menu to a disc in 2D, do this:
Note: before you burn the disc, you should ensure there is enough disc
space available (on the export folder drive/partition) for the temp file that is
created and then burned to the disc. For DVD production, 10 GB is required
(20 GB recommended). For Blu-ray Disc/AVCHD production, 60 GB
required (100 GB recommended). You can change the export folder to a
different drive/partition in File Preferences.
1. Click on the 2D Disc tab.
2. Click the Burn in 2D button. The Final Output window displays.
3. Configure the production preferences as follows:
Current drive: the burning drive (or removable disc for the AVCHD format)
CyberLink PowerDirector will use to burn the production to disc. If necessary,
click the button to select another drive and configure the burn
settings. See Configuring Burn Settings for more information. If you are
burning your production to a rewritable disc, you can click to erase it.

272
 Creating Discs

See Erasing Discs for more information.

Disc volume label: in the field provided, enter a label for your disc. The disc
label can be up to 16 characters long.
Burn to disc: ensure this option is selected if you want your production
burned to a disc.
Number of copies: in the field provided, enter the number of discs you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to burn for you in succession.
Save as disc image: select this option if you want to create a disc image file on
your computer's hard drive. Disc images can be burned to disc at a later time
if required. Click on to specify the folder where it is created.
Create a folder: select this option to create a disc folder on your computer
that contains all the files necessary for burning. Click on to specify the
folder where it is created. Creating a folder overwrites all of the existing data
in a directory.
Enable x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color
range than usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-
compliant stream, which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while
offering the opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback
environment is x.v.Color ready.
Enable hardware video encoder: enable this option to speed up rendering
and burning time. This option is only enabled if your computer supports
hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD
graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology).
4. When ready, click the Start Burning button to burn your production to disc.
Note: the burning process may take a few minutes, depending on the length
and quality of your video, and your computer's processing power. Be
prepared for a short wait while CyberLink PowerDirector renders your movie
and burns it to the disc. Time remaining does not include the time it takes
to finalize/close discs.

Burning a Disc in 3D
If you created a 3D* video production, click on the 3D Disc tab to configure your
disc's preferences and burn it to disc.

273
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version

table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Configuring Disc Preferences

The following preferences are available on the 3D Disc tab:
Disc Format
select the disc format type you want to use to burn your video to a disc.
Depending on the disc format type that you select, there may be a drop-down
option to select the capacity of the disc.
Video and Audio Settings
Select the video recording format: if available for your selected disc format,
select the recording format of the video on your disc and its aspect ratio.
Select the video encoding format and quality: if available for your selected
disc format, select a video encoding format and video quality for your disc
from the drop-downs. For quality, select the Smart Fit option if you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to automatically adjust the bitrate to create the best
quality video file possible, which will fit the capacity of the disc you are using.
Select the audio encoding format and channels: select an audio format for
your disc, and the number of channels it is capable of outputting to. If
burning a DVD, Blu-ray Disc, or AVCHD disc, you can select Dolby Digital to
create a disc with Dolby Digital 2 or 5.1 surround sound. If burning a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc, you can also select DTS to have CyberLink PowerDirector use the
DTS 5.1 Producer to create a disc with DTS 5.1 surround sound.
Note: the video quality and audio type options that are available depend on
the disc format that you have selected.

3D output format: select the 3D output source format of the video that is
rendered and then burned to the disc.
Note: subtitles and disc menus are not supported on 3D discs using the
side-by-side 3D source format.

Enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround: if available, select this option to

enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround to enhance the menu background

274
 Creating Discs

music. Choose from Living Room, Theater, or Stadium.

Burning the Disc

To burn your video production and created menu to a disc in 3D, do this:
Note: before you burn the disc, you should ensure there is enough disc
space available (on the export folder drive/partition) for the temp file that is
created and then burned to the disc. For DVD production, 10 GB is required
(20 GB recommended). For Blu-ray Disc/AVCHD production, 60 GB
required (100 GB recommended). You can change the export folder to a
different drive/partition in File Preferences.
1. Click on the 3D Disc tab.
2. Click the Burn in 3D button. The Final Output window displays.
3. Configure the production preferences as follows:
Current drive: the burning drive (or removable disc for the AVCHD format)
CyberLink PowerDirector will use to burn the production to disc. If necessary,
click the button to select another drive and configure the burn
settings. See Configuring Burn Settings for more information. If you are
burning your production to a rewritable disc, you can click to erase it.
See Erasing Discs for more information.
Disc volume label: in the field provided, enter a label for your disc. The disc
label can be up to 16 characters long.
Burn to disc: ensure this option is selected if you want your production
burned to a disc.
Number of copies: in the field provided, enter the number of discs you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to burn for you in succession.
Save as disc image: select this option if you want to create a disc image file on
your computer's hard drive. Disc images can be burned to disc at a later time
if required. Click on to specify the folder where it is created.
Create a folder: select this option to create a disc folder on your computer
that contains all the files necessary for burning. Click on to specify the
folder where it is created. Creating a folder overwrites all of the existing data

275
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

in a directory.
Enable x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color
range than usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-
compliant stream, which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while
offering the opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback
environment is x.v.Color ready.
Enable hardware video encoder: enable this option to speed up rendering
and burning time. This option is only enabled if your computer supports
hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD
graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology).
4. When ready, click the Start Burning button to burn your production to disc.
Note: the burning process may take a few minutes, depending on the length
and quality of your video and your computer's processing power. Be
prepared for a short wait while CyberLink PowerDirector renders your movie
and burns it to the disc. Time remaining does not include the time it takes
to finalize/close discs.

Configuring Burn Settings

Before you burn to a disc for the first time, it is advised that you click on to
set your burning configuration as follows:
Recording drive: select the burning drive CyberLink PowerDirector will use to
burn the production to disc.
Recording speed: set the recording speed used when burning the disc. If you
encounter errors during the burning process, try lowering the burning speed.
Include buffer under-run protection: select this option to ensure that video is
written to disc without interruption. An interruption in video burning can
result in an unusable disc.
After you set this configuration, CyberLink PowerDirector uses the same
configuration each time you burn until you change the settings.

Erasing Discs
If you are using a rewritable disc, you can erase content that has data previously
recorded on it. This allows you to reuse the same discs over and over without the

276
 Creating Discs

need to continually buy new discs. Click on the button to begin erasing a
disc.

To erase a disc, select:

the Quick option to erase the disc index contained on the disc.
the Full option to erase all of the content the disc contains.
Click OK to erase the disc.

277
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

278
 Po w erDirecto r Preferences

Chapter 19:

PowerDirector Preferences
To set your preferences in CyberLink PowerDirector, just click the button.

General Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the General tab. The available options are as
follows:
Application:
Maximum undo levels: enter the number (between 0 and 100) of undos
(Ctrl+Z) you would like to make available while you work on your video
production. Setting a higher number consumes more CPU resources.
Audio channels: select the default number of channels for the audio in your
video production when editing and previewing it. If Stereo is selected,
CyberLink PowerDirector will downmix any 5.1 channel audio to two channels
during preview.
Note: when editing and previewing video or audio with 7.1 channels, it is
downmixed to the number of audio channels selected in this preference
option.

Timeline frame rate: select the TV format (NTSC or PAL) and frame rate for
your video production. The format should correspond to the region in which
you plan to play your video (if you burn it to disc). The frame rate should
correspond to the source video footage being used in your production.
Use drop frame timecode: if your selected TV format is NTSC, select "Yes" to
synchronize the timecode of your video to its video length in the timeline.
Show sound waveform in timeline: select to display the sound waveform in
the timeline that represents the sound levels in audio clips.
Enable HD video processing (shadow file): select this to speed up the editing
of high definition video by enabling CyberLink PowerDirector to process the
file faster. Enabling this consumes more CPU resources.
Auto delete temporary files every: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically delete temporary files created while editing, every specified

279
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

number of days. Click on the Manually Delete button if you want to select and
delete specific temporary files to free up disc space.
Internet:
Automatically check for software updates: select to periodically check for
updates or new versions of PowerDirector automatically.
Language:
Use system default language: select this option for the language display to be
the same as the language of your operating system.
User defined: select this option and then select the language from the drop-
down list that you want to use.

Capture Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Capture tab. The available options are as
follows:
Capture:
Add captured files to media library: select this option to import captured files
into the media library directly after capture.
Add captured files to empty workspace: select this option to automatically
import captured files into an empty area in the workspace (timeline).
Enable automatic file replacement when recording voice-over: select this
option to overwrite existing audio if the voice-over overlaps during recording.
Auto scene detection:
Do not detect scenes after capture: select this option if you do not want to
activate the auto scene detection function after video is captured.
After capture, detect scenes by change of video frames: select this option to
perform scene detection after video capture. Once capture is complete, the
Detect Scenes window is opened, displaying the captured video. See
Detecting Scenes in a Video Clip for more information.
During capture, detect scenes by timecode, and then save each scene as a
separate file (DV-VCR mode only): select this option to detect scene break
signals and to save each scene as a separate file. (DV camcorders generate a

280
 Po w erDirecto r Preferences

scene break signal on the tape whenever users release the REC button.) This
feature is only available in DV camcorder capture.
DV parameters setup:
click the DV Parameters button to set the buffer time (in the Batch capture/
Writing to tape sections) for your DV camcorder. Setting a buffer time ensures
that your DV camcorder and the batch capture/ writing to tape function begin
at the same time. Without a buffer, batch capturing or writing to tape may
begin before the camcorder is engaged. In the DV auto stop section of the DV
Parameters Setup window, select whether you want CyberLink PowerDirector
to automatically stop scanning/capturing after a specified interval of blank
tape. You can specific the interval, in seconds, in the field provided.

Confirmation Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Confirmation tab. The available options are as
follows:
Confirmation
Always prompt me when timeline frame rates conflict: select this option to
enable a warning message when you add a video clip to the workspace whose
frame rate conflicts with the project's timeline frame rate set in General
preferences.
Always prompt me when aspect ratios conflict: select this option to enable a
warning message when you add a video clip to the workspace whose aspect
conflicts with that of the project.
Enable file deletion from hard drive: select this option if you would like to
enable the deletion of files from your hard drive when in the media library.
Enable warning when chapters are removed during editing: select this option
to enable a warning message if chapter points are deleted during video
editing.
Always prompt me when widescreen is not supported: select this option if
you want PowerDirector to notify you when a widescreen format is not
supported.
Always prompt me when I import high definition video into the library: select
this option if you want PowerDirector to notify you when you are importing
high definition video into the media library.

281
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Always prompt me to confirm captured video prefix name: select this option
if you want PowerDirector to ask you for a file name when capturing videos in
the capture window. If you deselect this option, PowerDirector will auto name
the files for you.
Always prompt me to confirm captured snapshot file name: select this option
if you want PowerDirector to ask you for a file name when capturing screen
snapshots of video. If you deselect this option, PowerDirector will auto name
the files for you.
Always enter the full feature editor at startup: select this option if you don't
want PowerDirector to ask you which editing mode it should open every time
you launch the program. Once selected, the full feature editor is auto opened
every time you open the program.
Always prompt me when entering 3D full screen mode: select this option if
you want PowerDirector to prompt you when it enters 3D full screen mode on
some computers that can only view 3D content at full screen.
Always prompt me when there is a poor quality segment in Content Aware
Editing: select this option if you want PowerDirector to ask if you want to
auto fix segments of video that are shaky or have poor lighting when
encountered during the analysis process of Content Aware Editing.
Always prompt me when entering non real-time preview mode: select this
option if you want to be prompted every time you click the play button when
non real-time preview mode is enabled.
Always prompt me before pasting keyframes attributes: select this option if
you want to be prompted every time you try and paste a clip's keyframe
attributes onto another clip.

DirectorZone Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the DirectorZone tab. The available options are
as follows:
Auto sign in:
Auto sign in to DirectorZone: select this option and then enter in your e-mail
address and password to automatically sign in to DirectorZone when the
program is opened. If you do not have a DirectorZone account, click on the
Get an Account button.

282
 Po w erDirecto r Preferences

Privacy rules:
Allow DirectorZone to gather editing information: select this option to allow
DirectorZone to collect all of the names of the templates used in a finished
project you upload to YouTube.

Editing Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Editing tab. The available options are as
follows:
Timeline:
Set default transition behavior: select the default behavior of transitions
added between two clips on a timeline track. See Setting Transition Behavior
for more information on the differences between the overlap and cross
transition.
Default workspace: select whether to display the timeline or storyboard
editing workspace by default in the Edit window.
Add transition between photos when applying Magic Motion: select this
option to add the transition selected in Transition type between photos when
using the Magic Motion tool and apply to all photos.
Add an effect and a title when using Freeze Frame: select this option to
automatically add an effect and title effect to the timeline when you click the
Freeze Frame button.
Enable continuous thumbnails on video clips for easy scene recognition: select
this option to enable frame thumbnails throughout the video clips inserted
on the timeline. Enabling this option makes it easier to find the different
scenes in your clips.

283
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Switch to move mode automatically during playback: select this option if you
want PowerDirector to auto switch to movie mode when previewing your
video production. Doing this allows you to preview all the content in your
production, instead of just the selected clip.
Enable snap to clips in timeline: deselect this option if you don't want clips to
snap to other clips when moving them around on the timeline tracks.
Durations:
set the default durations (in seconds) for image files and the different effects,
transitions, titles, subtitles, etc. when placed in the timeline.

File Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the File tab. The available options are as follows:
Default locations:
Import folder: indicates the last folder that media was imported from. To
change this folder, click Browse and then select a new folder.
Export folder: set the folder where captured media is saved. To change this
folder, click Browse and then select a new folder.
Note: the export folder is where produced projects are outputted to by
default. Also, when you burn a file to disc, this folder is where the temp file
is created before burning it to disc.

File name:
Captured video prefix: enter a default name for captured video files. When
capturing from a DV/HDV tape, select the Append time information after the
file prefix option to add the date captured information to the file name.
Production file prefix: enter a default name for your produced files.
Snapshot file name: enter a default name for captured snapshots in both 2D
and 3D. Select a file format from the drop-down list for your snapshots. You

284
 Po w erDirecto r Preferences

have the choice of BMP, JPG, GIF and PNG 2D formats, or MPO and JPS when
taking snapshots of 3D content. The captured 3D snapshots are also in 3D.
Snapshot destination: select the location where PowerDirector saves captured
snapshots from the drop-down. You can save them as a file, copy them to
your clipboard, or set them as your wallpaper background on your
computer's desktop.
Use original video size as snapshot image quality whenever possible: select
this option if you want the image to be the same size and quality as the
original video, instead of the smaller preview window it is taken in.

Display Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Display tab. The available options are as
follows:
Preview quality: select the default preview quality from the list (Full HD*, HD*,
high, normal, low) to set the resolution/quality of the video used when
previewing your movie in the preview window. The higher the quality you
select, the more resources that are required to preview your video project.
Note: Full HD and HD preview resolution are only available when the Ultra
version of CyberLink PowerDirector is installed on a 64-bit operating
system.

Preview mode: select the default preview mode used when previewing video
production:
Real-time Preview: synchronizes and renders clips and effects in real-time,
displaying a preview of your video at the specified frames per second.

Non Real-time Preview: mutes the audio and displays a preview at a

reduced speed to help make editing much more fluid. Useful when editing
high-definition video, using multiple PiP tracks on a less powerful
computer, or when you receive dropped frames when previewing. By
muting the audio and slowing down the video, CyberLink PowerDirector
lets you view more frames per second when your computer has trouble
providing a smooth preview during editing.

Snap to reference lines*: select to have the selected objects in the preview
window snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and the boundary of the window.
TV safe zone: select to enable a box on the preview window that indicates the

285
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

on-screen area of most TV displays.

Grid lines: select the number of lines you want to display in a grid over the
video image in the preview window. Use this grid to more precisely place the
PiP media and title text where you want on the video image.
Dual preview*: if you have a secondary display device, such as a monitor, TV,
or DV camcorder connected to your computer, you can select it from this
drop-down to extend your workspace and preview your project on a
secondary display. See Dual Preview for more detailed information.
3D* display configuration: from the drop-down select your default 3D display
device. See 3D Configuration for more detailed information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Hardware Acceleration
Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Hardware Acceleration tab. The available
options are as follows:
Hardware acceleration:
Note: ensure you download and install the latest drivers, and any related
hardware acceleration software, for your computer's graphics card to
enable this feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.

Enable OpenCL technology to speed up video effect preview/render: if your

computer supports GPU hardware acceleration, select this option to speed up
the rendering of some video effects by tapping into the multi-core parallel
processing power of your computer.
Note: to activate hardware acceleration technology during production,
select Hardware video encoder in the production preferences section of
the produce window before production. If your computer does not support
Open CL, the wording on the UI will be replaced with the supported
hardware acceleration technology (Intel Effect Acceleration, NVIDIA CUDA,
or AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing).
Enable hardware decoding: if your computer supports NVIDIA CUDA/AMD
Accelerated Parallel Processing/Intel Core Processor Family technology, select

286
 Po w erDirecto r Preferences

this option to use hardware acceleration to decode the video during the
editing process and when producing video.

Project Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Project tab. The available options are as
follows:
Project:
Number of recently used projects: enter the number (between 0 and 20) of
recently used projects that you would like to make available in the File menu
when you open CyberLink PowerDirector.
Automatically load the last project when PowerDirector opens: select this
option to automatically load the last project you were working on.
Automatically load sample clips when PowerDirector opens: select this option
to automatically load the sample image and video clips into your media
library when the program opens.
Auto save project every: select this to automatically save your project every
specified number of minutes, so you don't lose your changes by accident. If
you want to set a specific location for the auto save files, click the Browse
button and select a folder location on your computer.

Produce Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Produce tab. The available options are as
follows:
Produce:
Reduce video blocky artifacts (Intel SSE4 optimized): select this option to
improve the production overall quality of produced video, if your computer
supports Intel SSE4 optimization.
Reduce video noise when using MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and H.264 software
encoders: select this option if you want CyberLink PowerDirector to auto
apply video denoise when encoding MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and H.264 video during
production.

287
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

H.264 AVC:
Allow SVRT on single IDR H.264 video: select this option if you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to use SVRT to render a movie project when you
only have one H.264 AVC clip on the timeline. See Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for
more information on SVRT.

Improvement Program
Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Improvement Program tab. The available
options are as follows:
CyberLink Product Improvement Program
I want to participate: select this item if you would like to participate in the
CyberLink Product Improvement Program for PowerDirector. Once enabled,
CyberLink PowerDirector will collect information about the hardware and
software configuration of your computer system, as well as your usage
behavior and statistics related to the software. Click the Read more
information about the improvement program online link to view more
detailed information about the content collected.
Note: the CyberLink Product Improvement Program for PowerDirector will
not collect any personal information for purposes of identifying you.

CyberLink Cloud Preferences

In the Preferences window, select the CyberLink Cloud* tab. The available options
are as follows:
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.

Back up and restore your program settings: If you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription you can click Back up to CyberLink Cloud to back up program
preferences, keyboard hotkeys, and custom output profiles to CyberLink
Cloud. Click Restore from CyberLink Cloud to replace your current program
settings with the ones you previously backed up on CyberLink Cloud.

288
 Po w erDirecto r Preferences

Download folder: click the Browse button to change the folder where
CyberLink Cloud effects, projects, and media are stored when downloaded.
Clear CyberLink Cloud cache: click the Clear Offline Cache button to free up
some disk space by emptying the temp files stored when downloading
content from CyberLink Cloud.
Sign out from CyberLink Cloud service: if you are currently signed in to
CyberLink Cloud, click the button to sign yourself out.
Note: click the Account Information link in the bottom right corner of the
preferences windows if you want to know your CyberLink Cloud
subscription expiry date, how much storage space you have, and more.

289
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

290
 Po w erDirecto r Ho tkeys

Chapter 20:

PowerDirector Hotkeys
CyberLink PowerDirector includes a number of keyboard hotkeys that can make the
whole video editing process go more quickly and smoothly.
CyberLink PowerDirector has many Default Keyboard Hotkeys, but you can also
fully customize the hotkeys to fit your requirements. See Customizing Keyboard
Hotkeys for detailed information.

Default Keyboard Hotkeys

The following is a list of the default keyboard hotkeys in CyberLink PowerDirector
when the program is first installed.
Note: if the hotkeys were modified in the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys
window, this list will no longer be accurate. Select PowerDirector
Default from the Hotkey set drop-down in the Customize Keyboard
Hotkeys window to reset them back to these default values.
Application Menu Bar Hotkeys
System Hotkeys
Capture Hotkeys
Edit Hotkeys
Designer Hotkeys

291
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Application Menu Bar Hotkeys

Hotkeys Command

File
Ctrl + N Create new project
Ctrl + Shift + W New workspace
Ctrl + O Open existing project
Ctrl + S Save project
Ctrl + Shift + S Save project as
Ctrl + Q Import media files
Ctrl + W Import a media folder
Alt + F9 Switch to Capture module
Alt + F10 Switch to Edit module
Alt + F11 Switch to Produce module
Alt + F12 Switch to Burn (EZProducer/Create Disc) module
Alt + P Display project properties
Alt + F4 Exit CyberLink PowerDirector
Edit
Ctrl + Z Undo
Ctrl + Y Redo
Ctrl + X Cut
Shift + X Cut and leave gap
Ctrl + Alt + X Cut and move clips on the same track
Alt + X Cut and move all timeline clips after removed clip
Ctrl + C Copy
Ctrl + V Paste
Alt + left arrow Move timeline selected object one frame left
key
Alt + right arrow Move timeline selected object one frame right

292
 Po w erDirecto r Ho tkeys

Hotkeys Command

key
Shift + left arrow Go to previous marker
key
Shift + right Go to next marker
arrow key
Shift + M Add marker at current timeline position
Alt + 1 Opens Magic Mix function
Alt + 2 Opens Magic Motion function
Alt + 3 Opens Magic Cut function
Alt + 4 Opens Magic Style function
Alt + 5 Opens Magic Music function
Alt + 6 Opens Magic Movie Wizard
F2 Modify (selected clip in PiP/Particle/Title Designer)
Ctrl + Alt + T Open Trim window
Delete Delete/Remove selected item(s)
Shift + Delete Remove and leave gap
Ctrl + Delete Remove and move clips on the same track
Alt + Delete Remove and move all timeline clips after removed clip
Ctrl + A Select all
Ctrl + T Split clip at current timeline slider position
Ctrl + P Take a snapshot of content in the preview window
Ctrl + D Detect scenes
Alt + H Customize keyboard hotkeys
Alt + C Open user preferences window
View
Tab Switch between timeline/storyboard view
F3 Switch to Media Room
F4 Switch to Effect Room

293
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Hotkeys Command

F5 Switch to PiP Room

F6 Switch to Particle Room
F7 Switch to Title Room
F8 Switch to Transition Room
F9 Switch to Audio Mixing Room
F10 Switch to Voice Over Room
F11 Switch to Chapter Room
F12 Switch to Subtitle Room
+ Zoom in on timeline ruler
- Zoom out on timeline ruler
Alt + S View SVRT information
Playback
Page Up Switch to Clip mode
Page Down Switch to Movie mode
Space Play/Pause
Ctrl + / Stop
, Previous unit (seek by frame, second, etc.)
. Next unit (seek by frame, second, etc.)
Home Go to the beginning of clip/project
End Go to the end of clip/project
Ctrl + left arrow Go to previous clip in track (Clip mode)
key
Ctrl + right arrow Go to next clip in track (Clip mode)
key
Alt + up arrow Next second
key
Alt + down arrow Previous second
key

294
 Po w erDirecto r Ho tkeys

Hotkeys Command

Ctrl + G Go to timecode
Ctrl + F Fast forward
Ctrl + U Adjust system volume
Ctrl + Backspace Mute/Mute off
F Full screen

System Hotkeys
Hotkeys Command

F1 Open help file

Delete Delete/Remove selected item(s)
Shift + F12 View hotkey list
Alt + F4 Exit CyberLink PowerDirector

Capture Hotkeys
Hotkeys Command

Alt + R Start/Pause recording

Space DV play/pause preview
Ctrl + / DV stop preview
Ctrl + , DV rewind
Ctrl + . DV fast forward
Alt + Y Add text captions on captured video

295
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Edit Hotkeys
Hotkeys Command

Library
Ctrl + A Select all
Ctrl + Tab Filter media type in media library
Ctrl + D Detect scenes
Ctrl + Q Import media files
Ctrl + W Import a media folder
Workspace
Ctrl + Drop Overwrite content on track when a clip is dropped on
another clip
Shift + Drop Move all clips on the timeline to the right when a clip is
dropped on another clip
Alt + Drop Lay the clip over the existing clip and add a transition
between the two clips when a clip is dropped on another clip
[ Mark in
] Mark out
1 Select camera 1 in MultiCam Designer
2 Select camera 2 in MultiCam Designer
3 Select camera 3 in MultiCam Designer
4 Select camera 4 in MultiCam Designer

Designer Hotkeys
Hotkeys Command

Ctrl + B Make text bold

Ctrl + I Make text italic
Ctrl + L Left-align text
Ctrl + R Right-align text

296
 Po w erDirecto r Ho tkeys

Hotkeys Command

Ctrl + E Center-align text

Up arrow key Move object up
Down arrow key Move object down
Left arrow key Move object left
Right arrow key Move object right
Alt + D Share template on DirectorZone

Customizing Keyboard Hotkeys

CyberLink PowerDirector lets you fully customize its keyboard shortcut hotkeys to
fit your requirements. You can even add hotkeys for commands that are not
available in the default keyboard hotkeys.

To customize the keyboard hotkeys, do this:

Note: click the Restore button if you need to reset a selected hotkey that
you customized, to the default value.

1. Select Edit > Keyboard Hotkeys > Customize from the menu. Or just press the
Alt+H keys on your keyboard to open the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys
window.
2. Browse to and find the hotkey command that you want to customize.
Note: if required, enter in a search keyword in the field provided for the
hotkey command you want to customize and then click . Click it
repeatedly to locate multiple instances of the inputted search keyword, if
required.
3. Click in the Hotkeys column next to the command you want to customize.
4. Press the hotkey combination on your computer's keyboard that you want to
use/replace the existing hotkey with.
Note: if the keyboard hotkey you specify is already in use in the program,
you will be asked if you want to remove it from the existing command to use
in the new specified command. The replaced command will no longer have
a keyboard hotkey associated to it.
5. Repeat the above steps to customize all the keyboard hotkeys to your

297
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

preference.
6. Once you are done, click the Apply button, enter a name for the new set of
customized keyboard hotkeys, and then click OK to apply and save the
changes.

Hotkey Sets
When you customize keyboard hotkeys in CyberLink PowerDirector, they are saved
as hotkey sets in the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys window. If required you can
create multiple sets of hotkeys, which are quickly accessible in the window.
In the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys window, you can:

quickly switch among the saved hotkey sets by selecting the one you want to
use from the Hotkey sets drop-down and then clicking the Apply button.
Select the PowerDirector Default hotkey set to use the original hotkey
settings.
edit an existing hotkey set by further customizing the keyboard hotkeys, and
then clicking the Apply button. Click the Save as button to save it as a brand
new hotkey set.
delete a custom hotkey set by selecting it in the Hotkey sets drop-down and
then clicking the Delete button.

Importing and Exporting Hotkey Sets

In the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys window you can export all of the hotkey sets
you created. This saves the custom to a file that can then be imported into another
version of CyberLink PowerDirector that supports the importing of hotkey sets.

To export a hotkey set, do this:

1. Select Edit > Keyboard Hotkeys > Export from the CyberLink PowerDirector
menu.
2. Specify a file name and save location on your computer.
3. Click the Save button to complete export process.
To import a hotkey set, do this:
4. Select Edit > Keyboard Hotkeys > Import from the CyberLink PowerDirector

298
 Po w erDirecto r Ho tkeys

menu.
5. Browse to the location of the exported file in the .PDH file format.
6. Click the Open button to complete the import process.

299
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

300
 Appendix

Chapter 21:

Appendix
This chapter contains reference information to help answer questions you may
have about the digital movie production process or about using CyberLink
PowerDirector.

Intelligent SVRT: When Is Used?

Intelligent SVRT can be applied to video clips in the MPEG-1, MPEG-2, H.264 and DV-
AVI (Type I) formats. In the following conditions, clips (or portions of clips) do not
require rendering during production, and SVRT can therefore be applied:
The frame rate, frame size, and file format are the same as those of the
destination production profile.
The bitrate is similar to that of the destination production profile.
The TV format is the same as that of the destination production profile. For
more information, see Setting TV (Video Clip Interlacing) Format.
If all of the above conditions are met, SVRT can be used. Any clips that do not meet
the above criteria are fully rendered without SVRT.
In the following conditions, clips (or portions of clips) must be rendered during
production, and SVRT can therefore not be applied:
Adding a title or transition effect
Modifying the color of a video clip
Merging two video clips (clips within 2 seconds before or after the merged
clips will be rendered)
Splitting a video clip (clips within 2 seconds before or after the split will be
rendered)
Trimming a video clip (clips within 2 seconds before or after the trimmed clip
will be rendered)
If the total duration of the production is less than one minute and any portion
of the video requires rendering, the entire production will be rendered for
efficiency reasons.

301
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Licensing and Copyright

Information
This section contains the PowerDirector licensing and copyright information,
including a copy of the Intel License Agreement for Open Source Computer Library
and the GNU Lesser General Public License. There is also a list of the third-party
components used in PowerDirector.
License Disclaimer
This product includes certain copyrighted third-party software components license
under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License and other similar license
agreements offering free distribution of these software components offered by
other organizations, if applicable. Copies of these agreements can be found by
clicking the link associated with each of the component provided in the table
below. You may also visit http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html for a copy of
GNU Lesser General Public License Agreement.
LGPL components and other components listed below are licensed without
warranties of any kind, either express or implied warranties, including without
limitation the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. The entire risk as the quality and performance of these components is
with you. Please check the respective license agreement for more details.
Copyright Holders under LGPL and/or other license agreements mentioned herein
shall not be responsible for any damages, general, special, incidental or
consequential, arising out of the use or inability to use these components/software.
Please check the respective license agreement for more details.
For a list of components of such nature, and to acquire the full source code of
these licensed components, including any scripts to control compilation and
installation of the object code, please see "List of Components" below.
Downloading Source Code
You can download the machine-readable source code of the corresponding
licensed component from http://www.cyberlink.com/. Please read the copyright
notice, the warranty disclaimer, and the license agreement accompanying these
source codes.

302
 Appendix

List of Components

Component License Information

cv.dll Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
cvaux.dll Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
highgui.dll Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
OptCVa6.dll Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
OptCVm6.dll Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
OptCVw7.dll Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
PThreadVC2.dll GNU Lesser General Public License

303
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Licenses and Copyrights

Below are the applicable licenses and copyright information that pertain to the
components listed in the List of Components.

Dolby Laboratories
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished
works. Copyright 2003-2005 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

DTS
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks, and DTS 5.1 Producer is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

304
 Appendix

MPEG-2 Packaged Media Notice

ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 PATENT PORTFOLOP, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S. Fiddlers Green Circle, Suite 400E,
Greenwood Village, Colorado 80111 U.S.A.

Intel License Agreement For Open Source

Computer Vision Library
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation, all rights reserved. Third party copyrights are
property of their respective owners.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistribution's of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistribution's in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors "as is" and any
express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event
shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special,
exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement
of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption)
however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or
tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this
software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

305
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

GNU Lesser General Public License

Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license
document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share
and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to
guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the
better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can
do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny
you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate
to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you
modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library,

306
 Appendix

you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink
them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2)
we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/
or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty
for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on,
the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that
the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free
program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users
of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore,
we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU
General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies
to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General
Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking
those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library,
the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the
original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking
only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public
License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to
protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides
other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free
programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in
certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the
widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To
achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free

307
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software
only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a

greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example,
permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more
people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom,
it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the
freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the
Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a
"work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,

DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called
"this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to
be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the
Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

308
 Appendix

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library
is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what
the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer
of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence
of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at
your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith
effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d
requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered

309
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the
Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License
instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all
the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General
Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version
2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the
ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative
works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties
are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is
designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
"work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the
Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

310
 Appendix

However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an
executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore
covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of
the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library
even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if
the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length),
then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a
derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object
code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that
work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work
that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used
in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a
copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you
must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a
reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an
executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify
the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the
modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of

311
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable
mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on
the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the
executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the
user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the
version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the
same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same
place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you
have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must
include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from
it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which
the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an
executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side
in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of
the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under
the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a

312
 Appendix

work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or
its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on
the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms
and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based
on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties
with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute
the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be
to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system

313
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made

generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/
donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar
in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have
the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any
later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not
specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.

NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

314
 Appendix

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO
YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.

CLAPACK Copyright Notice

Anderson, E. and Bai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and
Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J. and Greenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and
McKenney, A. and Sorensen, D. LAPACK User's Guide. Third Edition. Philadelphia,
PA: Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 1999. ISBN: 0-89871-447-8
(paperback)

315
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

316
 Technical Suppo rt

Chapter 22:

Technical Support
If you require technical support, then this chapter can help. It includes all the
information you need to find the answers you are looking for. You may also find
answers quickly by contacting your local distributor/dealer.

Before Contacting Technical

Support
Before contacting CyberLink technical support, please take advantage of one or
more of the following free support options:
consult the user’s guide or the online help installed with your program.
refer to the Knowledge Base at the following link on the CyberLink web site:
http://www.cyberlink.com/support/search-product-result.do
check the Help Resources page in this document.
When contacting technical support by e-mail or phone, please have the following
information ready:
registered product key (your product key can be found on the software disc
envelope, the box cover, or in the e-mail received after you purchased
CyberLink products on the CyberLink store).
the product name, version and build number, which generally can be found
by clicking on the product name image on the user interface.
the version of Windows installed on your system.
list of hardware devices on your system (capture card, sound card, VGA card)
and their specifications. For fastest results, please generate and attach your
system info using the DxDiag.txt.
Note: here are the steps to generate the system info DxDiag.txt file: Click
Windows (start) button, and then search for "dxdiag". Click Save All
Information button to save the DxDiag.txt file.

the wording of any warning messages that were displayed (you may want to
write this down or take a screen capture).

317
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

a detailed description of the problem and under what circumstances it

occurred.

Web Support
Solutions to your problems are available 24 hours a day at no cost on the CyberLink
web site:
Note: you must first register as a member before using CyberLink web
support.

CyberLink provides a wide range of web support options, including FAQs, in the
following languages:

Language Web Support URL

English http://www.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Traditional Chinese http://tw.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Japanese http://jp.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Spanish http://es.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Korean http://kr.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Simplified Chinese http://cn.cyberlink.com/cs-help
German http://de.cyberlink.com/cs-help
French http://fr.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Italian http://it.cyberlink.com/cs-help

Help Resources
The following is a list of help resources that may assist you when using any of
CyberLink's products.
Access CyberLink's Knowledge base and FAQ (frequently asked questions):
http://www.cyberlink.com/cs-resource
View video tutorials for your software: http://directorzone.cyberlink.com/
tutorial/

318
 Technical Suppo rt

Ask questions and get answers from our users on the CyberLink Community
Forum: http://forum.cyberlink.com/forum/forums/list/ENU.page
Note: CyberLink’s user community forum is only available in English and
German.

319
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

320
 Index

subtitles 223

Index title text 182

3D mode
enabling 31
3D-BD 259
1 3D-Like
overview 52
120Hz Time-sequential 31
3D-Ready HDTV 31

2 4
2D
4 color gradient
burning disc in 271
disc menu text 262
converting to 3D 118
PiP effects 144
producing in 228
title text 177
2K resolution
4K resolution
outputting in 2D 228
outputting in 2D 228
outputting in 3D 230
outputting in 3D 230
uploading 235
uploading 235

3 5
3D
5.1 surround 279
burn disc in 273
configuration 285
disc menu text 264
disc menus 269
7
output formats 231 7.1 channels
overview 52 downmixing 279
particle effects 164
PiP effects 145
preferences 285 A
producing in 230 Align 259
setting source format 50 Anaglyph 31, 230
321
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Android 233 unlinking 105

Animation WaveEditor 124
paint 137 waveform 94, 213
Aspect ratio AudioDirector 124
PiP media 143 AVCHD
setting project 43 capturing 56
setting video 112 AVCHD 2.0
title effects 180 burning to disc 271
Audio outputting in 2D 228
5.1 surround 279
7.1 channel 279
adding 91 B
AudioDirector 124
Background music
beat detection 94
disc menus 253
capturing 53
slideshows 13
channels 279
themes 81
dB meter 214
Backgrounds
denoise 119
adding to video 88
editing 99, 124
disc menus 260
extracting 64
particle effects 159
gain 214
title effects 176
importing 49
Batch produce 244
keyframes 119, 120
Blu-ray Discs
level meter 214
burning 247
mixing 214
disc image 273, 275
mixing in track 213
selecting 2D format 271
muting 124
selecting 3D format 273
normalizing 214
Bring forward 259
reversing 118
Burn
speed 118
2D disc 271
stereo 279
3D disc 273
sync by audio 96
disc image 273, 275
syncing to video 94
disc space 272, 275
transitions 192
settings 276
trimming 109
322
 Index

Burn creating 90
temp file 272, 275 ColorDirector
Buttons accessing 117
highlight style 268 presets 117
menu 267 Confirmation preferences 281
navigation 268 Content aware editing 20, 99
per page 255 Context menu 259
properties 268 Convert 2D to 3D 118
Copy keyframe attributes 150
Create disc 247
C Crop
images 114
Capture
videos 118
content 57
Cross transition 193
media 53
Crossfade 87, 88, 91, 133, 155
preferences 58, 280
CyberLink Cloud
quality 57
account information 288
settings 58
downloading effects 61
CD 56
overview 2
Chapters
pack project materials 44
adding 219
preferences 288
menu page 250
projects 47
thumbnails 219
signing out 288
Checkerboard 31
uploading disc menu templates 270
Chroma key
uploading paint animations 139
disc menu images 264
uploading particle effects 169
pip effects 143
uploading PiP effects 152
title effects 179, 182
uploading title effects 187
Clip mode 28
uploading transitions 210
CLPV 112, 113
uploading videos 230, 233, 235
Color
CyberLink Product Improvement Program 288
effects 117
fixing 119
Color boards
adding 88
323
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Disc menus
3D 269
D adding images 261
adding menu buttons 267
Dailymotion 235
adding text 261
dB meter 214
alignment 256
Default language 279
background 259
Design Studio
background music 253
Menu Designer 257
chroma key 264
Paint Designer 136
creating new 257
Particle Designer 157
customizing 257
PiP Designer 140
duration 255
Title Designer 173
editing properties 252
Detect
first play video 254
faces 11
Menu Designer 257
music beats 94
menu music duration 255
scenes, library 62
menu objects 256
scenes, trim 106
motion 260
Devices 233
opening, disable 252
Digital TV 56
playback mode 255
DirectorZone
selecting 250
downloading from 60
settings 252
overview 2
uploading 269
preferences 282
Discs
uploading disc menu templates 270
3D menus 269
uploading paint animations 139
burning 271
uploading particle effects 169
creating 247
uploading title effects 187
customizing menus 257
uploading transitions 210
editing menu 252
uploadng PiP effects 152
erasing 276
Disc image
importing content 248
2D 273
Menu Designer 257
3D 275
selecting menu 250
Disc menu text
Display
3D depth 264
3D 31, 285
324
 Index

Display modifying 128

dual preview 28 NewBlue 127
preferences 285 particles 155
Dolby PiP objects 133
copyright 304 shape 115
Dolby Digital 271, 273 titles 171
Download video 127
media 59 Emit method 161
Drawing 137 Emit rate 162
DTS 5.1 Producer 271, 273 Enhanced stabilizer 116
Dual preview 28 Erase
Duration 111 discs 276
DV camcorder 53 Paint Designer 137
DVDs Explorer view 25
burning 247 Export
capturing from 57 projects 44
disc image 273, 275 projects to CyberLink Cloud 47
selecting format 271, 273 Extract audio 64

E F
Easy editor 8 Facebook 235
Edge sharpness 208 Fades 215
Edit disc menu images 265
audio 124 PiP effects 145
content aware editing 99 Features
media 99 overview 1
Editing preferences 283 File preferences 284
Effects Flickr 59
adding 127 Formats
color 117 supported, 2D export 228
downloading 60 supported, 3D import 230
freeze frame 132 supported, discs 271
keyframes 121 supported, import 49
325
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Frame rate default 291

preview window 28
setting project 279
Freeform I
media 115
Images
position 120
adding 87
Freeze
aspect ratio 113
frame 132
cropping 114
time 137
effects 127, 129
Full feature editor 7
enhancing 116
fades 265

G fixing 116
importing 49
Gain 214 keyframes 119
General preferences 279 Magic Motion 130
Gravity 162 opacity 120
Green screen 143 PhotoDirector 117
Grid lines 28 shape 115
Group objects 34 transitions 189
Import
media 49
H projects 52
Insert 87
H.264 AVC
projects 52
outputting in 2D 228
Intelligent SVRT
outputting in 3D 230
overview 301
H.265 HEVC
utilizing 225
outputting in 2D 228
Interlaced video 112
Hardware acceleration
Interpolated technology 118
preferences 286
Invert
HDMI 1.4 Enabled 31
transition 206
HDV camcorder 55
iPad/iPhone/iPod 233
Help 318
ISO image 273, 275
Hotkeys 291
customizing 297
326
 Index

Magic Fix 125

Magic Motion 129
K designer 130
Magic Movie Wizard 97
Keyframes
Magic Music 93
adding 121
Magic Style 131
copying 119, 150, 185
Magic Tools 37
effects 128
Magnifier 127
PiP effects 150
Markers
settings 119
music beat 94
title effects 185
timeline 35
Masks
L creating 149
Media
Language 279 3D 50
Latest features 1 arranging 85
Lens flare 127 capturing 53
Library downloading 59
search 25 editing 99
window 23 importing 49
Life 162 searching for 25
Lighting shape 115
fixing 119 Menu Designer 257
Link 105 Meter
Lock sound level 214
range 38 Microphone 56
Loop playback 38 Micro-polarizer LCD 3D 31
Mix audio 214

M MKV
extracting subtitles 222
M2TS outputting in 2D 228
outputting in 2D 228 outputting in 3D 231
outputting in 3D 231 subtitles 221
Magic Cut 125 Mobile phone 233
Motion blur 140
327
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Motion blur 140 My DirectorZone 60

PiP media 149
title effects 185
Motion thumbnail N
disable 252
NewBlue 127
Movie mode 28
Niconico Douga 241
MP4
Non real-time
outputting in 2D 228
capture 58
outputting in 3D 231
preview 28
Multi cam
Normalize 214
sync by audio 96
NTSC 112, 279
Multi thumbnail 267
Multi trim 107
MultiCam Designer
changing 71
O
creating recorded content 69 OpenCL 286
hotkeys 296 Overlap transition 193
importing media 66 Overwrite 87
modifying 71
overview 65
saving 71 P
shadow file 69 Paint animation templates
synchronizing clips 68 creating 137
Music uploading 139
adding 91 Paint Designer 21
beat detection 94 using 136
disc menus 253 PAL 112, 279
editing 124 Particle Designer 157
importing 49 Particle effects
Magic Music 93 3D depth 164
menu duration 255 adding 155
mixing 214 adding objects 159
slideshows 13 images 159
trimming 109 keyframes 166
Mute audio 124
328
 Index

Particle effects motion blur 149

modifying 157 opacity 143
motion 165 overview 21
position 160 position 142, 143
properties 161 rotation 143
range 160 size 142
uploading 169 transparency 143
PhotoDirector uploading 152
accessing 117 PiP objects 21
Photos Playback
adding 87 loop 38
aspect ratio 113 Playstation 233
cropping 114 Plug-ins 65
editing 99 PNG
effects 127, 129 masks 149
enhancing 116 Postfix 189
fixing 116 Power Tools 118
importing 49 PowerDirector
keyframes 119 system requirements 4
Magic Motion 130 versions 3
PhotoDirector 117 PowerDirector Live 3
shape 115 Preferences 279
transitions 189 capture 58
PiP Designer 140 Prefix 189
PiP effects Presets 117
3D depth 145 Preview
adding 133 3D 31
aspect ratio 143 quality 28
chroma key 143 rendering 38
creating new 133 undocking window 31
customizing 134 window 27
fades 145 Produce 225
keyframes 150 batch 244
masks 149 overview 226
motion 146 preferences 287
329
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Produce 225
range 38
Profiles S
capture 57
Scenes 250
Progressive video 112
detecting 106
Projects
Screen snapshots 28
aspect ratio 43
Search
CyberLink Cloud 47
library 25
exporting 44
Send backward 259
inserting 52
Set 3D format 50
library 44
Settings
overview 43
burn 276
preferences 287
capture 58
producing 225
Shadow file
reusing 44
MultiCam Designer 69
saving 43
preferences 279
Shape 115

R Shift progression 201

Side-by-side 230
Range selection 38 Single thumbnail 267
Real-time preview 28 Single trim 106
Removable disk 271 Size limit 58
Render preview 38 Slideshows
Reverse 118 creating 11, 98
Ripple editing 87, 88, 133 designer 14
overview 86 music preference 13
Rooms 19 time-lapse 16
Root menu 250 Smart fit 271, 273
disable 252 SmartSound 93
Rotate 118 Snap to reference line 28
Row-Interleaved 31 Sound
dB meter 214
level meter 214
Source format 50
330
 Index

Speed 118 Time info 125

Split 104 Time limit 58
SRT 222 Timecode 279
Stabilizer Time-lapse 16
enhanced 116 Timeline
Stereo 279 adding markers 35
Storyboard 42 behavior 34
Subtitles 221 overview 33
3D depth 223 track overview 33
extracting 222 Title Designer 173
formatting 223 Title effects 171
importing 222 3D depth 182
menu page 250 adding text 175
MKV 222 animation 183
positioning 223 aspect ratio 180
Supported formats 49 chroma key 179, 182
Surround sound 271, 273 images 175
SVRT keyframes 185
overview 301 motion 183
utilizing 225 motion blur 185
Symmetry 162 opacity 180
Sync particles 175
by audio 96 position 176, 180
MultiCam Designer 68 properties 177
System requirements 4 rotation 180
scale 180
size 180
T transparency 180
uploading 187
Tags 25
Track manager 38
Technical support 317
Tracks
Temp file 272, 275
adding 38
Theme Designer 73
overview 33
Thumbnail index 252
Transition Designer 195
Tilt shift 127
Transitions 189
331
CyberLink Po w erDirecto r

Transitions 189 adding 87

alpha 195 aspect ratio 43, 112
audio 192 capturing 53
behavior 193 color effects 117
creating 196 ColorDirector 117
cross 193 content aware editing 20, 99
editing 197 converting for portable device 230
inverting 206 converting to 3D 118
modifying settings 194 cropping 118
overlap 193 denoise 119
Transition Designer 195 detecting scenes 62
uploading 210 editing 99
Trim effects 127
audio 109 enhancing 116
video 106 extracting audio 64
TrueTheater 3D 118 fixing 116
TrueTheater HD 116, 119 frame rate 28, 279
TrueVelocity 1 importing 49
TV interlacing format 112
capture 55 keyframes 119
format 112 motion 120
safe zone 28 muting 124
TV format 279 opacity 120
presets 117
producing 225
U reversing 118
rotation 120
Ultra HD 228
rotational camera shake 116
Undock 31
shape 115
Unlink 64, 105
speed 118
sync by audio 96
V syncing audio 94
transitions 189
Version table 3 trimming 106
Videos unlinking audio 105
332
 Index

Videos YouTube 235

uploading to CyberLink Cloud 230, 233, 235
Vimeo 235
Voice clips Z
adding 91
Zoom 31
mixing 214
recording 216
trimming 109
Voice over 216
Volume
keyframes 120

W
Water reflection 127
Wave 162
WaveEditor 124
Waveform 94, 213
Web support 318
Webcam 56
White balance 119
Workspace
creating new 43
expanding 26
overview 19

X
Xbox 233

Y
Youku 243

333